JP2022152254A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest of a game.SOLUTION: When a specific result is achieved in a predetermined determination, it is possible to execute a specific game (big winning game) that can acquire a game medium. According to the end of the specific game, a game state is controlled to an advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state. In one specific game, a specific display (prize ball number performance) may be executed on a display unit that shows the number of game media that can be acquired in multiple specific games including the one specific game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 65

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot is achieved, and when a predetermined condition such as a jackpot is established in the determination, a jackpot game in which game media can be obtained is executed.

Then, when a jackpot game is being executed, the number of game media that can be acquired in the jackpot game may be displayed (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-181254 A

However, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the enjoyment of games in gaming machines that display the number of game media that can be obtained.

The game machine according to the present invention is
game control means capable of executing a specific game capable of acquiring game media when a predetermined determination results in a specific result;
A game machine comprising an effect control means capable of displaying predetermined information on a display unit,
According to the end of the specific game, the game control means may set an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The effect control means may execute, in one specific game, a specific display indicating the number of game media obtainable in a plurality of specific games including the one specific game, on the display unit. Characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view for explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view for explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view for explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of display devices. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing normal figure-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special figure-related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a ready-to-win determination table. It is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of the 1st look-ahead determination table. It is a structural example of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probability variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening production, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round production, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production design, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production design display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation effect of no reach loss. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure fluctuation production until reaching reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. FIG. 24 is a continuation of FIG. 23, showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 25 showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 26, showing an example of SP reach. It is a figure showing an example of movable body production|presentation. It is a figure showing an example of operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a pending|holding production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing; FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram representing a continuation of FIG. 35 ; 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing. It is a flow chart of special design variation processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of production control main processing. 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; FIG. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46 ; 1 is a front view of a game board unit according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. It is a configuration example of a small hit symbol type determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table for a non-limiter jackpot game according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table for a limiter jackpot game according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of a small winning game large winning opening control table, (B) is a configuration example of a small winning game specific area control table. It is a time chart showing the control content of the small winning game. It is a time chart for explaining a specific example of the interference of the auxiliary game with respect to the winning to the second big winning opening in the small winning game. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game state setting table (normal game state) according to the first embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of the game state setting table (time saving state) according to the first embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; It is a diagram schematically showing the main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of a general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. (A) is a configuration example of an advantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of an advantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart of game control side timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process according to the first embodiment, which is the part after step S220. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing according to the first embodiment; It is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of special design confirmation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the example of the various production|presentation which concerns on a jackpot game. It is a figure showing the specific example of specific production in the 2nd small hit. It is a figure showing the specific example of specific production in the 1st small hit. It is a figure showing the example of a counter image. It is a figure showing the whole production|presentation flow of a special mode. It is a structural example of each 1st special production|presentation pattern determination regarding big-hit fluctuation|variation and small-hit fluctuation|variation. It is a configuration example of each first special effect pattern determination related to the loss variation. It is a figure showing the example of a 1st special production|presentation. It is a figure showing the example of a 1st special production|presentation. It is a figure showing the example of a 1st special production|presentation. It is a figure showing the example of a 1st special production|presentation. It is a figure showing the example of a 1st special production|presentation.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characterizing portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplification of description, by describing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc. corresponding to the symbols or codes will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY refer to the left, right, up and down directions (as seen from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY to the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY to the pachinko gaming machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1 and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU. The game machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game parlor, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame 22 rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. a door 23;

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21 .

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22 . The front door 23 includes a frame-like front frame 23m in which a substantially vertically long rectangular large opening is formed approximately in the center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU faces the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in the game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY through the transparent plate 23t.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The handle 72k is rotatable clockwise, and the amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude of force (firing strength) applied to the game ball to shoot the game ball. there is Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

An upper plate 34 protruding forward greatly and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided at the lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. A first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided in the center of the front side of the upper plate 34. - 特許庁An operating portion of the first effect button 40k protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is formed in a hemispherical shape. Further, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34. As shown in FIG. Further, the upper surface of the lower plate 35 is provided with a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing surplus game balls that cannot be stored in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Further, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the front transparent plate 23t of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, face downward and extend in a predetermined horizontal direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. In addition, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower portion of the right decorative body 32. As shown in FIG. The operating portion of the second effect button 41k is shaped like a bar. Furthermore, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34 .

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board performance unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front.

A substantially ring-shaped center decoration 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 so as to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, outside the center decoration 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration 61 and an outer rail 62 between the left portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration 61 are provided. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61 are formed.

A game area 6 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 by a center decoration 61, an outer rail 62, an inner rail 63, and the like. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration 61, the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63. As shown in FIG. A region surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launching region 7 through which the launched game ball can travel toward the playing region 6 .

The game area 6 is an area in which a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY. The game area 6 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown). The game nail is suitable for the game ball entering the game area 6 and flowing down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that guides to

A general winning device 10</b>D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6 . The general prize winning device 10D is formed with a general prize winning port 10 that allows game balls to enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. As shown in FIG. The first start winning device 11D is formed so that a game ball can enter the first start opening 11. - 特許庁The first starting prize winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball can enter. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the first starting hole 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A warp portion 61w is formed from the left side of the center decorative body 61 to the lower end thereof, through which a game ball is passed. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decoration 61. As shown in FIG. The game ball entering the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. As shown in FIG. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y for guiding the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guiding portion 61y.

Immediately below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed state and an open state by an electric-tube opening/closing member 12k provided in the electric-tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k.

The electric tube opening/closing member 12k is formed of a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from a retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6.例文帳に追加When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second start opening 12 is opened so that a ball can be entered. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball and guides it to the second starting port 12 from the horizontal portion.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61 . The gate 13 is configured to allow passage of game balls. Even if the game balls pass through the gate 13, the prize balls are not paid out. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A big winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and downstream of the gate 13 . The big winning device 14D is formed with a big winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed state and an open state by an AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the big prize winning device 14D. That is, the big winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially oblong rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that the upper end of the AT opening/closing member 14k falls forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the big winning opening 14 is opened so that a ball can be entered.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big winning hole 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (nine in the basic embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the big winning hole 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, below the big winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed obliquely downward to the left, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second start port 12 is formed in the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the A game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12 , but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11 .

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 11, the second start hole 12, the big prize hole 14, and the general prize hole 10, and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as the first start hole 11, The second starting gate 12, the big prize gate 14, the general prize gate 10, and the "winning" to the gate 13 are collectively called.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot right-handed. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to enter the gate 13, the second starting hole 12, or the big winning hole 14 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right.

In addition, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board effect unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and has a display section 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1 .

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a laterally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided in the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55 k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50 . The movable board body 55k is arranged at the initial position, and in the standby state, the lower end portion of the movable board body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a portion of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player in the standby state, and the majority thereof is invisible (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and can be raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the board movable body 55k is positioned substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined working position can be appropriately set, and whether the board movable body 55k is positioned above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A in a front view. good.

In addition, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in front view about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). The rotary motion of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the plate movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the display devices 8 arranged to the right of the vertical center of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (parts other than the game area 6) will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special symbol 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1"), a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2 ) is variably displayed, and a normal pattern display 82 that variably displays a normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") is included. In addition, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the special figure 1 reservation number described later, and a special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b that displays the special figure 2 reservation number described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and the special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Also, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure indicator 81". Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The stop-displayed special figure (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a big winning game with the opening of the big winning opening 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lights up, ■: lights out) to the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot pattern and represents a jackpot. Also, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the rightmost LED is finally lit up like "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed over a predetermined variation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure may not be performed immediately. Specifically, it is a case where the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or during the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are suspended based on the winning prize. This suspended special figure lottery and variable display of the special figure are referred to as "special figure reservation".

For the special figure reservation, the special figure 1 lottery reserved based on the winning to the first start opening 11, and the "special figure 1 reservation" representing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the winning to the second start opening 12 There is a special figure 2 lottery reserved based on, and a "special figure 2 reservation" representing a variable display of the special figure 2. And, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a displays the number of special figure 1 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 lottery and special figure 1 variable display. On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 lotteries and the number of special figure 2 variable displays.

It is also possible to set or not set the upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations. Also, when providing an upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation may be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 pending indicator 83a and the special figure 2 pending indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by lighting the LEDs by the number of special figure 1 pending and special figure 2 pending Display the number of FIG. 1 pending and special figure 2 pending. In the following, the number of special figure 1 reservations is called "special figure 1 reservation number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 reservations is called "special figure 2 reservation number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 reservation number" and "special figure 2 reservation number" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". Furthermore, "special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a" and "special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

In addition, the variable display of the general pattern is executed when the general pattern lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the general pattern informs the result of the general pattern lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The stopped normal map (stop normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern, an auxiliary game with opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general pattern indicator 82 represents the general pattern corresponding to the result of the general pattern lottery, that is, the result of the general pattern lottery. When the result of the normal drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs are finally lit like "□□" (□: lighting, ▪: lighting off). This lighting mode is a winning pattern and represents a winning. In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED is finally lit like "■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as a lost pattern.

In addition, before the normal map is stop-displayed, the normal map is displayed with fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variable display mode of the normal map is a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY, there is a game control board 100 for performing control (progress of the game) related to a game in which a game profit can be obtained. Power is supplied to the performance control board 120 for controlling the performance, the image control board 140 for controlling the image, the payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game balls, and each board 100, 120, 140, 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches on/off of the power supply.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. It should be noted that games that can obtain game profits to be controlled by the game control board 100 include special figure lottery, variable display of special figure, jackpot game, setting of game state to be described later, normal figure lottery, and variable display of general figure. , Auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game memory. A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, an auxiliary A game control table and the like are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 105 . Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, when there is a prize to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 of the game ball, a special figure reservation can occur, but if a special figure reservation is possible, that is, the number of special figure reservations When the upper limit has not been reached, based on this winning prize, judgment information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special lottery or the like is acquired. And this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning the second starting port 12 of the game ball. The determination information that is to be referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information". Also, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Also, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100 . In addition, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The gate sensor 13 a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14 .

In addition, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

It should be noted that the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the game control board 100 is connected with the display devices 8 (a special figure display device 81, a normal figure display device 82, and a special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The card unit CU and the payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the ejection device 72 is also connected. The card unit CU is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY, and is a device that enables ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out prize balls and rental balls. The paid-out prize balls and rental balls are detected by a pay-out sensor 73a for counting them.

A shooting device 72 is a device for shooting game balls. A handle 72k is included in the shooting device 72 and constitutes an operating section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with the handle 72k by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

Further, the handle 72k is connected to a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting motor 72m so that the game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

In addition, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the game control board 100 , the effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 .

In addition, the connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 is possible. That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as communication direction control means (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The performance control board 120 can be positioned as a performance control section that controls the performance together with the image control board 140, the audio control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, and board movable body 55k, etc.) for game effects, customer waiting effects, and operation promotion. It is sufficient if the performance and the like can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure fluctuation effects, pending effects, jackpot game effects, etc.), customer waiting effects, and operations of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes an operation prompting effect that prompts an operation during a valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs and the like for controlling performance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123. A performance CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 includes a starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 for storing a starting winning command to be described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designation command to be described later, and a special figure fluctuation start command to be described later. A variation start command storage unit 127 is provided.

An image control board 140 is connected to the performance control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. to do Incidentally, the connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both transmission of signals from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50 and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 . All or part of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, patterns, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including patterns) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, through the voice control circuit 161 from the speaker 52 voice, music, and Outputs sound effects, etc.

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 . Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured by a substrate and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Also, the performance control board 120 is connected to various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120 . In addition, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k is pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k is pressed. The 1st production|presentation button sensor 40a and the 2nd production|presentation button sensor 41a will output the signal according to the content of the detection to the production|presentation control board 120, if it detects that each was operated.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a board movable body rotation motor 55m1 and a board movable body lifting motor 55m2. The disk movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The movable board body lifting motor 55m2 can lift or lower the lifting member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, hereinafter, the operation of the "rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as the "operation of the movable board 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the lifting member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the board movable body 55k."

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100 and the like. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. In addition, the data stored in ROM123 for production|presentation of the production|presentation control board 120 is used for preparation of light emission pattern data.

It should be noted that the CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162 formed of a board. In this case, the CPU may be caused to control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like, and control the operation of the board movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a normal pattern lottery when the launched game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later.

When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed, the game ball passing through the gate 13 is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as the variable display of the normal pattern and the auxiliary game based on the establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition, the acquisition of the general pattern related determination information and the general pattern lottery. can be done. As shown in FIG. 8A, normal pattern random numbers are included in the general pattern related determination information to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using a hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to hit and lose, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. If the result of the hit determination is hit, the hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. It should be noted that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination/normal pattern variable display Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern using a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table such as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving There is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (shorter normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used when in the state.

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure (losing normal figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped is determined to be a normal pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds, and the normal pattern when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of , it is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times.

Then, the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is opened.

Elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko game machine PY controls an auxiliary game using an auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). It should be noted that the specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time during which it is difficult to win the game balls such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, it is longer than the first opening time, such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closed) of 1.0 seconds, and the game ball wins the electric chew 12D. The electric tube 12D is opened only for a second opening time that is easy to set.

In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also called "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in that auxiliary game. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a big winning pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Further, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the game based on the winning is terminated without the big winning game being played.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Furthermore, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Further, hereinafter, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 12 is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko game machine PY carries out a series of games such as variable display of special figures and jackpot games based on acquisition of special figure-related determination information and performing special figure lottery when starting conditions are established. And, in order to perform the variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made for the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number and a special figure variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment uses a jackpot judgment table to determine whether it is a jackpot (whether or not a jackpot game is executed), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with the later-described game state. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as a "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state described later (hereinafter , "High Probability Jackpot Judgment Table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the game state, the jackpot, which is the result of the jackpot determination, and the loss, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is distributed. The pachinko game machine PY collates the acquired special symbol random number with a jackpot determination table associated with the game state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table.

In addition, it is possible to appropriately change how to distribute the special symbol random number determination value for the determination result of the jackpot probability and various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination Jackpot pattern type determination determines the jackpot pattern type (jackpot pattern type) using a jackpot pattern type determination table as shown in FIG. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of the jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot (contents advantageous to the player) composed of the game benefits given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (the jackpot symbol type determination is generated) is performed. It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

A plurality of types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the special figure 1 jackpot pattern and the special figure 2 jackpot pattern can be set as appropriate, but for example, like the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. As a result, three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, are provided. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination is, for example, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, using a reach determination table as shown in FIG. to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state, and a reach determination table (time-saving reach) used in the time-saving state. decision table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (not generate reach)", which is the result of reach determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (whether or not to generate reach).

As shown in FIG. 10 (C), the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "with reach (generate reach)" can be different between the reach determination table for non-time saving and the reach determination table for time saving. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is called "with reach (generating reach)" is called "losing with reach", and "no reach ( It does not generate reach)” is sometimes called “no reach”. In addition, "losing without reach" is sometimes referred to as "losing", and "losing with reach" is sometimes referred to as "losing reach".

3-2-4. Special Figure Variation Pattern Judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure fluctuation pattern Judgment table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of the variable display of the special figure.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time, the so-called "scale", and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production (production contents), it is also possible to include identification information regarding the result of the big hit determination and the result of the reach determination. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the type and number of special figure variation patterns.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination was performed It is possible to associate with the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and the variable display of special figure 2 There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing.

And each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is used when the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) and the time saving state used in the non-time saving state There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 pending number. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used for .

And, the variation display of the special figure of the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . After the variable display of the special figure, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable special figure display (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special figure is not performed immediately, and the next special figure is continuously displayed. , a jackpot game is executed.

Also, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure variation performance as shown in the third column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, a typical production that constitutes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as productions constituting the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production.

The normal fluctuation indicates that the stop-displayed performance symbols have started to fluctuate, and each one of the performance symbols is displayed variably at such a high speed that it is difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbols has started. It is a performance to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation production related to the loss fluctuation without reach (the part from the start of the fluctuation of the production pattern to the stop of the fluctuation), and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special figure fluctuation production where the reach occurs is normal fluctuation It may consist of

N reach, immediately after the reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuation, for example, the production pattern that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at that position for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The production pattern slows down, and it is a production that fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The expectation of a big hit suggested by N reach is higher than normal variation and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure fluctuation performance ends with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern that fluctuates at the low speed is stopped. In the case of a loss, the remaining one production pattern is stopped with a production pattern different from the production pattern constituting the ready-to-win. When the special figure fluctuation performance is not completed with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern fluctuates again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach can be executed both when a big win is made and when a loss is made, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will be entered, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the L reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than the N reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the L-reach dedicated background image (the L-reach dedicated video is played). Note that in the L-reach mode, a 2DCG animation image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As for the content of the L reach, an image of a scene different from the game related to the SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as special training for the main character to acquire a special move.

The SP reach can be executed both at the time of a big hit and at the time of a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will occur, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer period of time than the L reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-only background image (the SP reach-only video is played). In SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the effect contents of the SP reach, an image of a scene in which the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the main character's rival belongs is displayed.

A battle production|presentation is production|presentation which can be performed, for example after a reach in a time-saving state, and is production|presentation which suggests that a big-hit expectation degree is higher than normal fluctuation|variation. Even in the battle production, the established reach is maintained, but the production patterns that make up the reach are reduced and predetermined positions (upper right of)), it switches to a background image dedicated to battle production (a video dedicated to battle production flows). Also, in the battle effect, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and the "state where the reach is maintained" in the battle production, the production patterns constituting the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle production are displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition to the state in which it is visible in the display unit 50a, for example, it includes a state in which the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or invisible for a predetermined period of time in relation to the dedicated background image. Also, the contents of normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the production that constitutes the special figure fluctuation production is not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, the special figure variation pattern can be named by associating the big hit determination result and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect. . And the special-figure variation pattern related to the big hit may be collectively referred to as "big-hit variation", and the special-figure variation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

In addition, regardless of the jackpot determination result, the special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed is "SP reach variation", the special figure variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special figure variation in N reach The special figure variation pattern that the production ends may be collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, the loss variation with reach is sometimes referred to as “loss variation with reach”, and the loss variation without reach is collectively referred to as “normal loss variation”.

3-2-5. Look-ahead determination The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform look-ahead determination using a look-ahead determination table such as that shown in FIGS. be. The look-ahead determination table includes the type of starting opening related to the starting winning (first starting opening 11 / second starting opening 12), in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed according to the starting winning (special figure 1 / special figure 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed by winning the first start opening 11, and the second start opening 12 is won and the special figure There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) for the case where 2 variable display is performed. The prefetching determination based on the first prefetching determination table is also referred to as "first prefetching determination", and the prefetching determination based on the second prefetching determination table is also referred to as "second prefetching determination".

The look-ahead determination table can also be associated with later-described game states (normal game state/high-probability high-base game state/low-probability high-base game state). That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (normal game state lookahead determination table) used in the normal game state and a lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state look-ahead determination table) and a look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state (low-probability high-base game state look-ahead determination table).

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the first look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high-base game state and a second look-ahead determination table used for

In addition, by the prefetching determination using the prefetching determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by the winning to the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure variation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a look-ahead determination result.

And, the look-ahead judgment result containing the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a result of the prefetch determination along with its generation. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of information is specified as the prefetch determination result. For example, information on the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the look-ahead determination result.

As described above, the special figure is variably displayed on the special figure display device 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination. Then, in the variable display of the special symbols, when the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special symbols is not carried out, and the big winning game is executed continuously. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the big winning port 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and the final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending.

In addition, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Also, hereinafter, the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) round game is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is also called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Then, the pachinko game machine PY controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the jackpot symbol type. One type or a plurality of types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements (jackpot game components) that constitute the jackpot game. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning opening 14 in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening to be opened, and the time to close until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can control a jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the types of jackpot games and jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), 10 round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), five round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), five round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), ten round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), round games are performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), six round games are performed. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning port 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 elapses, The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. Also, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Also, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed in a different method. You can do so. For example, a device that can be distributed to two winning ports is provided in the game area 6, and when one winning port is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of more round games than the number or a jackpot game consisting of round games less than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, a game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be described. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not executed. The non-jackpot game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Elements that are "advantageous to the player" related to the specific game state include the probability of a big win and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 . That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start port 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

Advantageous to the player with regard to the probability of a big win means that the probability of a big win is higher than in the normal game state, and it becomes easier to win a big win. In addition, the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player when the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal game state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. It means it takes longer.

The specific game state includes a first specific game state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time are advantageous to the player, and a second specific game state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific game state and a third specific game state in which only the open time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it is also possible to mount some of the three types of specific game states without mounting all of these three types of specific game states on the pachinko gaming machine PY.

Here, as a partial game state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state and is advantageous to the player is called a "high-probability state". On the other hand, the state in which the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal game state and the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called "normal probability state".

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal game state, A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time-saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal game state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is called "non-time-saving". state.

Here, the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which it is easier to win the second starting port 12 than the non-time saving state. Here, the specific method for making it easy to win the 2nd starting mouth 12 in a time saving state rather than a non-working time saving state is demonstrated.

For example, the time saving state can be made easier to win the second starting port 12 in the time saving state by making the normal figure fluctuation time easier to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state let it be decided. As a result, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time increases in the time saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the normal drawing lottery per unit time The larger the number of executions, the longer the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time.

In addition, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time is equal, so once The longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game, the longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time.

Furthermore, by setting the time saving state to a state in which it is more likely to be determined as winning in the winning determination than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536 in the hit determination, whereas in the time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536 in the hit determination. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time and normal figure fluctuation time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability that it will be determined as a hit in the hit determination is high. , the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, so the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time increases.

Thus, in the time saving state, winning is easier than in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to be shortened, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to be long. By satisfying the three conditions, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and winning to the second starting port 12 can be facilitated. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of balls won to the number of balls fired, is high. Therefore, in the time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In addition, in a time saving state, you may make it meet only a one part condition, without meeting all the three conditions for opening time per unit time of the 2nd starting port 12 to become long. Ultimately, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state, and the winning to the second start port 12 should be facilitated.

Also, in the time saving state, such as making it easier to select a special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time compared to the non-time saving state, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed per unit time is small, or special The average of the figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure suspension is digested becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure suspension) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, each specific game state is associated with the content of the advantage for the player, the first specific game state is referred to as "high probability high base game state", and the second specific game state is referred to as "high probability low Base game state” and the third specific game state are also referred to as “low probability high base game state”. Furthermore, the normal game state is also referred to as "low probability low base game state".

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in the normal probability state and non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base game state is normal probability state and time saving state, the high probability low base game state is high probability state and non time saving state, and the high probability high base game state is high probability state and time saving state. It can be said that there is a game state.

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low-probability low-base game state, a low-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, a high-probability high-base game state, and a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is also advantageous to the player because the jackpot 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot game state and the specific game state can also be called "advantageous game state" which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the ease of winning the second start port 12 is higher than the non-time-saving state. It is in play state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state opens the jackpot 14 in which the number of prize balls per winning is greater than the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. It is a game state more advantageous to the player than the state.

Also, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is set first. Also, the jackpot game state is set by performing the stop display of the jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific game state is set when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be explained.

3-5. Setting of Game State upon End of Big Win Game The pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a game state upon the end of the big win game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a new game state. The duration of this game state can be set appropriately. For example, as a new game state, a specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. Also, it is possible to limit the period during which the specific game state can be continued.

When the duration of the specific game state is limited, the specific game state can be terminated when the end condition for the duration is met. Then, when the specific game state ends, the normal game state can be set. Further, as for the high-probability high-base game state, when the end condition is established, the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state may be continued until the next big win is won. Also, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state, and when the end condition is established, the normal game state may be set.

Also, the termination condition for the continuation period of the specific game state can be appropriately set. As the termination condition, for example, the number of executions of the special figure variable display can be set. In addition, not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls shot after the jackpot game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state An end condition can be set such as derivation of the result of termination in a lottery (so-called “drop lottery”) to determine whether or not. Furthermore, these elements may be set as the termination condition independently or may be set in combination.

These end conditions may be set identically for all specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You can Furthermore, the end condition may be changed for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the termination condition, and the content of the termination condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot pattern type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled by the state. Here, this high-probability high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without providing an end condition. Furthermore, the game may be controlled in a low-probability high base game state after the end of the big-hit game relating to the big-hit symbol C and the big-hit symbol E. Here, an end condition can be provided for this low-probability high-base game state, and the end condition can be set to a special figure variable display of 100 times. It should be noted that the relationship between this jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

Further, paying attention to the game profit of the jackpot, the jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also called "high probability jackpot". Furthermore, a jackpot in which a game progresses in a high-probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable variable jackpot". In addition, the jackpot in which the game progresses in the normal probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also called "time saving jackpot".

4. Main Effects by Game Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 32. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a probability variable production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to effects include setting the volume of sound output from the speaker 52, setting the brightness of the display section 50a, and setting the frequency of effects to be executed. It should be noted that the setting items related to effects can be set as appropriate. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demonstration video G100.

The normal production mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is in the normal game state. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of subordinate production modes belonging to the normal production mode. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

In addition, below, the production|presentation mode of the hierarchy of the lower rank which belongs to production|presentation mode is also called "production stage." Along with that, the first normal production mode is also called "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also called "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also called "third normal production stage". Say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically after the power of the pachinko machine PY is turned on, the production mode set when the special figure fluctuation display is started for the first time is the first normal production stage ( 1st normal production mode). However, the type of effect mode that is set first is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this manner, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate. For example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Furthermore, as a switching condition, it is also possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, reach may occur in the special figure fluctuation production, but the special figure fluctuation production is established for the entire section of the special figure fluctuation production when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The former part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal variation".

Then, in the front part of the first normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the second normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the third normal production stage, a background image (FIG. 17C: third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a background image common to the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

In addition, the normal production mode can be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal production mode may be a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state. Alternatively, it may be set only in the "high-probability low base game state", a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Furthermore, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation production mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability high base game state. In the first part of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . Also, in the latter part of the variable probability production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability production mode is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode can be set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is either the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability high-base game state, and is at least time-saving. It is a production mode indicating that it is in a state. In the former part of the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . In addition, in the latter part of the time saving production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving production mode is displayed.

It should be noted that the time-saving production mode is set only in the low-probability high base game state, and can also be a production mode indicating that it is in the low-probability high base game state.

In addition, for either or any one of the variable probability production mode and the short production time production mode, as in the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are further provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied, the production stage is switched. You can do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18A, an opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-hand shot image G2 prompting "right-hand shot" are displayed on the display unit 50a. A jackpot opening production is displayed. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as a jackpot opening effect in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18(B), during the round game in the jackpot game, the display unit 50a continuously displays the right shot image G2 from the opening and the round image indicating the number of rounds. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a number-of-balls image G4 suggesting the number of balls paid out are displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the display unit 50a displays a background image (background for round An image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display unit 50a indicates the ending image G5 indicating the production mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls. A jackpot ending production is performed in which a total winning ball number image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the ending image G5 and the total number of winning balls image G6 on the display unit 50a as a jackpot ending effect. be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as "jackpot game effect" as the effect executed in the big win game. That is, a big hit game effect is performed in the big win effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko machine PY has a special figure variation pattern and a special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed.

In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of performance symbols, the game stops after the performance symbols are varied. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. And, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production design.

It should be noted that, in the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, a special effect device using various production devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board movable device 55, a first production button device 40, and a second production button device 41 It is possible to perform figure variation effects.

Next, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described in the special figure variation effect executed according to the special figure variable display. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and is provided in a plurality of types. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the performance design constitutes identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of performance design are provided according to the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), it is possible to configure nine performance symbols by configuring the performance symbols from numbers 1 to 9. Then, the production design including the number "1" is set as the production design G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For the sake of convenience, when dealing with individual production designs without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "production designs G10".

Also, the number portions of the production symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The number portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, a color is included in the component of the production pattern G10. It should be noted that the configuration of the production pattern G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, you may add other components, such as a character matched with each number, to the production|presentation design G10.

Next, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the left side, the center and the right side of the display unit 50a are divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. It can be a region 50b3. A production design G10 is displayed in each of the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first stage part of the special figure fluctuation production, the production design G10 displayed in the left production design area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left production design EZ1", and the production design G10 displayed in the middle production design area 50b2. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "the middle effect symbol EZ2" and the "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3, the production design G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the production design in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

In addition, as will be described later, in the special figure fluctuation production, the variation display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but finally, the special figure lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type, reach determination result) is shown. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the mode. Then, when notifying a big hit as a result of the special lottery, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 with the same number are arranged side by side (so-called "double eyes"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 stopped and displayed when informing a big win is referred to as a "big win effect pattern". For example, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as "7.7.7", the jackpot production pattern is "production pattern G10g", and when they are stopped as "9.9.9", the jackpot production pattern is " production pattern G10i”. Further, the jackpot effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect design. For example, if the jackpot performance pattern is "production pattern G10g", the jackpot production pattern is "7", and if the jackpot production pattern is "production pattern G10i", the jackpot production pattern is "9". In addition, as will be described later, in the special figure fluctuation production, the special figure lottery result is completely shown when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special figure fluctuation production, before the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed once may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing a certain jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode showing another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be Therefore, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (before being changed) in such a manner that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 initially indicate a big hit, the performance symbols G10 consisting of the same numbers constituting the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Also referred to as "jackpot effect pattern".

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation performance, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are the same number performance symbols G10. Reach may be performed with a temporary stop display (temporary stop display). As will be described later, the ready-to-win is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state, and by performing the ready-to-win, the chance for the big win is increased. Therefore, the effect symbol G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to reach is called "ready-to-win effect symbol". For example, when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with the effect symbol G10a of "1", the ready-to-win effect symbol becomes "effect symbol G10a", and the temporary stop display is performed with the effect symbol G10a of "3". , the ready-to-win production pattern is "production pattern G10c". Further, the ready-to-win production pattern may be abbreviated by the number included in the production pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, a small pattern area 50c for variably displaying a small pattern can be provided in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display portion 50a. In the small design area 50c, the small design can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small pattern can be appropriately set, but for example, the number part of the effect pattern G10 can be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left effect pattern region 50b1, the middle effect pattern region 50b2, the right effect pattern region 50b3, and the small pattern region 50c are indicated by dashed lines. These are shown to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

In addition, as described above, there are normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects as effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect. Some of these are described here.

4-2-1. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal variation will be specifically described. As small patterns, a left small pattern KZ1, a medium and small pattern KZ2, and a right small pattern KZ3 corresponding to the left production pattern EZ1, the middle production pattern EZ2, and the right production pattern EZ3 are variably displayed in the small pattern region 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), in the display section 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the pattern KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is started, FIG. As shown in , the special figure fluctuation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small pattern KZ1, the middle and small pattern KZ2 and the right small pattern KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be made different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the respective performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. It is also possible to change the position one after another at a fixed position. Incidentally, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be made the same.

Further, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at a high speed immediately after the variable display is started. While the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically background images such as the background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is a special figure variation pattern of no reach loss (for example, normal loss variation), the end of the variable display of the special figure (special figure stop display), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in the losing eyes peculiar to the reachless losing (so-called "breaking eyes").

For the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stop (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) while lined up in the horizontal direction at the approximately center position in the vertical direction, are completely completed all at once, as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed). When the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped by loose stitches, that is, when the final stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, three small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is stopped all at once with the same loose stitches as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

It should be noted that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped means that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in the case of scroll display, but sway slightly or reciprocate slightly on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed. A definitive stop indication may be broadly referred to as a “stop indication”. Also, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the production patterns are stopped in the order of the left production pattern EZ1 → right production pattern EZ3 → middle production pattern EZ2, but the order of stopping ( method) is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, establishment of reach will be described. Even if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern (for example, N loss fluctuation) with reach, basically in the same manner as the case of no reach described above, in the display unit 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right performance symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are aligned horizontally at substantially the center position in the vertical direction and are temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), and ready-to-win is established. When reach is established, an image (image suggesting reach establishment) G11 indicating that reach is established is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is established with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the ready-to-win is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the order of the left production pattern EZ1 → the right production pattern EZ3, but the order (method) of the temporary stop is this. can be set as appropriate. Also, the number of the production pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win is not limited to "5". Further, the position for provisionally stopping (temporary stopping) is not limited to the substantially center position in the vertical direction. Also, the direction in which the performance symbols constituting the ready-to-win are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special figure fluctuation production in the case of no reach loss and the interval from the start of the special figure fluctuation production to the establishment of the reach when reach occurs can be made normal fluctuation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure variation pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various announcement effects such as a so-called "pseudo-continuation", a cut-in announcement, a line announcement, etc. until the ready-to-win is established. Alternatively, it is possible to plunge into a so-called "zone" until reach is established.

4-2-3. N reach The pachinko game machine PY can perform N reach when reach is established after normal variation. The N-reach is an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special lottery may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. Next, the N reach will be specifically described.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 22A, the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N-reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the middle effect symbol EZ2 that is displayed (scrolled) at high speed in the normal mode gradually decelerates.

When the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, N loss variation), from the state where the reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 is provisionally at the vertical direction approximately center position Stop (temporary stop) at the end and stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1), the middle production pattern consisting of numbers ("4" in FIG. 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers constituting the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state. Stop display of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 is performed.

In addition, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped by the losing eyes peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The two small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped all at once with the same losing pattern with reach as the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the content of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure fluctuation production does not end with N reach, as shown in FIG. Reach may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L reach Pachinko game machine PY can perform L reach after N reach. The L reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in the L reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, a background image exclusively for the L reach (L reach background image G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L-reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Three is developed. The content of the story of the moving image related to the L-reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to a girl.

When the L-reach background image G114 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 23A, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23B, a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at substantially the center of the display portion 50a, as the middle effect pattern EZ2, the effect pattern of the number "5" forming the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" not forming the reach appear. Then, it rotates slowly so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the production pattern of number "4" and the production pattern of number "5" are continuously rotated, the three related to the background image G114 for L reach advances. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), the main character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the approximate center of the display part 50a, the effect pattern of the number "5" which constitutes the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" which does not constitute the reach mutually repel the opponent. collide with. Since the production pattern of the number "5" constitutes the reach, and the production pattern of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the production pattern of the number "4" is flipped off and the production pattern of the number "5" is replaced. If it remains, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big win is established, while when the performance symbol of the number "5" is flipped away and the performance symbol of the number "4" remains, the performance of the mode indicating reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L-reach, and a production suggesting a big win (jackpot suggesting production) is executed or a production suggesting a loss (loss suggesting production) is executed. It constitutes a branch point (so-called “hit-lose branch point”) where it branches.

At the win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the special figure variable display is the jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After the display, as shown in FIG. 24(B-1), the main character who is pleased with the successful confession is displayed, and the speaker 52 outputs a predetermined sound effect. At this time, together with the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitute the reach, the medium effect pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display part 50a. displayed in the form. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.

The display of the main character who is pleased with the successful confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect form a big win suggestive presentation. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

On the other hand, after the winning branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the background image G114 for L reach is displayed without a jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 24(A-2), the display unit 50a displays a close-up of a girl with a sad expression, and then, as shown in FIG. 24(B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. A main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach, the middle production pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped in the center of the display part 50a. is displayed. That is, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach-losing.

The display of the main character who has failed in confession and is disappointed constitutes a failure suggestive presentation. After the loss suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

4-2-5. SP reach In addition, the pachinko game machine PY can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the L reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in SP reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the moving image related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and an enemy character who are rivals of the main character face each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 25A, an enemy character appears, and then, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25C, a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26A, the main character throws the ball, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character comes to an end. This scene constitutes a branching point (win-lose branching point) at which the main character wins in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, suggesting a big win, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a big hit variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 27(B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and yells on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.

The display of the main character screaming after winning the confrontation and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute the big win suggestive presentation. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 27(B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the main character who is disappointed after being defeated in the confrontation constitutes a failure-indicating effect. After the losing indication effect, as shown in FIG. 27(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

Next, the movable body production and the operation production performed in the special figure fluctuation production will be described. The movable body production and the operation production are the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, and N reach, and even when they are performed as part of these productions in the form of being incorporated in the jackpot game production, etc., and independent of these productions. may be performed. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body effect involving the action of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body production is, for example, a production using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a production that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body production functions as a production that suggests development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view, and held at that position for a predetermined time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4. Operation Effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko game machine PY provides an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure fluctuation effect or a big hit game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance. It works as a performance.

For example, as described above, when the hit-drop branch point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (operation valid period) occurs, and with the occurrence of this operation valid period , as shown in FIG. 29A, an effect (operation prompting effect) for prompting the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion effect, a first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing An operation image) G12b and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29B shows a state in which the effective operation period has occurred and 1/3 of the effective operation time has elapsed.

Then, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed in the operation valid period, or the first production button in the operation valid period After the remaining time of the operation valid period expires without the operation of 40k, the operation result presentation is performed.

As an operation result presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable body presentation. Further, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result presentation. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k rises, thereby completing the operation result presentation. When the operation result production ends, a jackpot suggestion production is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation valid period, or the first production button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation effective period expires without being performed, the operation result performance is not performed, and the failure suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special figure variation performance, and can be executed in the big hit performance as well.

4-5. Look-Ahead Effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display that is the target of the special figure reservation will be described. The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead performance for the special figure 1 suspension or the special figure 2 suspension in which the big hit determination is not performed based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation performance. . The look-ahead performance is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve, and functions as a performance for expecting a big win from before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reserve. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a pending change notice using a pending effect representing a special figure pending. Here, the suspension effect and the suspension change notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the suspension effect is performed in a suspension display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section of the lower end of the display section 50a. The reserved display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the reserved display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. That is, in the reservation display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is performed first based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs first among the special figure 1 reservations being reserved. A pending icon representing the special figure 1 pending is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 reservation A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed in the 2nd to 4th is displayed.

In the following, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1". Similarly, the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the fourth area 50d4 "reserved order 2 special figure 1 hold", "reserved order 3 of It is called "special figure 1 reservation" and "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, for the existing special figure 1 reservation, it is called "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order of occurrence.

A display area 50e is formed to the left of the reserved display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. Although not included, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon are related, so hereinafter, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon will be collectively referred to as "holding effect". Also, the pending icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation display during execution indicated by the icon is also referred to as "the fluctuation".

In FIG. 30(A), the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e are indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by broken lines. It is shown to show the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the holding effect will be described. In the following description, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is during the special figure 1 variable display (during the special figure variation production), and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred first among the currently suspended special figure 1 suspension (reservation order 1 special figure 1 suspension) is displayed, and in the second region 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred next to the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA2 (reservation order 2 A pending icon HA3 representing special figure 1 pending) is displayed. In addition, the icon HA1 representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed in the display area 50e (not shown). Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30B is the normal mode.

In this way, in the suspension effect, they are displayed side by side from the left end of the suspension display area 50d to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 suspension has occurred. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol suspension storage unit 105 is individually displayed with a suspension icon. be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension representing the suspension icon HA2, the suspension icon HA2 and the suspension icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the suspended icon HA2 and the suspended icon HA3 that have been displayed are shifted one by one to the left. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 pending represented by the pending icon HA3 is the first special figure 1 pending among the currently pending special figures 1 pending. This is to adapt the pending icon HA2 and the pending icon HA3 to the situation in accordance with the fact that the special figure variable display is started next.

In addition, since the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, as a word before "icon", the icon displayed in the reserved display area 50d is "reserved", and the icon displayed in the display area 50e is "relevant". In other words, when the pending icon is displayed, if the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is established for the special symbol pending indicated by the pending icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the starting condition is started. A corresponding pending icon is displayed as the icon.

When the reserved icon changes to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the reserved display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged about twice as it moves from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when the game ball enters the first start port 11 and special figure 1 suspension occurs, as shown in FIG. An icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when the special figure 1-related random number is acquired by winning the first starting port 11, one common icon is displayed. This icon disappears when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (suspended state and running state) , it will exist under different names (pending icon and the icon in question).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the pending icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the win/fail information and the special figure variation pattern information. Displaying the suspension icon in a special mode is called "suspension notice".

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when the pending notice is given, the player can expect to win a big win by variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of a hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the pending notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) is the special mode.

As one type of pending notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the pending icon is displayed. There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the suspension icon HA4 of the normal mode is displayed in the above-described second region 50d2 (not shown). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal form appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made completely stationary, the display position does not move. It may be configured so as to sway lightly on the ground.

Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (hold notice is performed). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after being displayed, but it may be displayed in the special mode to eliminate the period of display in the normal mode.

As another type of pending notice, there is a pending notice type that becomes a special mode when the pending icon moves, in other words, a pending notice type in which a pending icon change notice is performed during the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the second region 50d2 (not shown) of the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) is displayed as the suspension icon HA4. to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. The reserved icon HA3 moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the reserved icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (hold notice is performed). .

Moreover, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the pending advance notice so that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon is associated with the color of the pending icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the pending icon. Here, white is the normal aspect and green, red, and gold are special aspects. The degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white<green<red<gold.

In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA. It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55 . Furthermore, as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues without interruption until the special figure fluctuation display is started after being executed, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, the effect pattern is stopped. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as each time the display is performed or each time the variable display of the effect symbols is started.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 [Game Control Main Processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 . The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads and executes a game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on processing, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, SIO (System Input/Output), PIO (Parallel Input/Output), CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: interrupt time management) circuit) are set.

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), 1 is added to the counter value of various random numbers related to the normal symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). During the interruption permission, it is possible to execute the game control side timer interruption process (S005). The game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, by normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) Various random number counter values are updated repeatedly. It should be noted that, if an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 when the interrupt is disabled, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 captures the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and uses it as the lower tray fullness data for the game. stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104 for use.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the counter value of various random numbers related to the general figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt processing ( After the end of S005), it is performed in both the period until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S106). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and terminates the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S107), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first start port 11, the prize ball counter for the second start port 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning port 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning port 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170.例文帳に追加Then, when a prize ball signal is transmitted, update processing is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter associated with the signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the game control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec ), the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again. The game control microcomputer 101 is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005) in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again. command etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If the game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO at S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if the game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES at S201), a predetermined number of game balls General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning hole 10 (“3” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 .

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status = 1, which will be described later, in other words, whether either the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO at S204), proceed to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES at S204), the counter value of the normal design random number counter (label-TRND-F) (S205), the obtained general pattern random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 86 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 proceed to

In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 12, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second start port 12 (NO at S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second start port 12 (YES at S207), the predetermined A second starting hole prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second start hole 12 (“2” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the second start hole 12 .

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 2 reservation number counter) that counts the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "4" or more (is less than "4") ( NO in S209), special figure 2 reservation number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 2 reservation number counter, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 2 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first start port 11 (NO at S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first start port 11 (YES at S214), the predetermined A first start opening prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the first start hole 11 ("4" in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the first start hole 11.

Next, the special figure 1 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more (S216). If the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "4" or more (less than) (NO in S216 ), special figure 1 reservation number addition processing is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 1 reservation number counter, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 1 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first prefetch determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. When the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 14 (NO at S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and when the game ball has entered the big winning hole 14 (YES at S221) It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "11" (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winning openings 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the specified winning number is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), ending the sensor detection process. In the big winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the big winning hole 14 (“9” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14 .

A sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided as a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, and based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor, processes other than the processes shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a description will be given of normal operation processing relating to the control of the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing relating to the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (steps). "Normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", normal design standby processing (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", normal design variation processing (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. "Normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal design standby process (S1102), hit determination is performed based on the normal design random number stored in the normal design reservation storage unit 86. Further, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal pattern fluctuation display of the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82. and change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command according to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal pattern fluctuation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed since the normal pattern fluctuation display being executed started (whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display is terminated). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has passed, the normal figure stop display is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal design determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed. In the normal pattern determination process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the normal pattern being executed started (whether to end the stop display of the normal pattern) or not), and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. If it is not a winning pattern (if the stopped normal pattern is a losing pattern), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

Auxiliary game control processing (S1105) is processing that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special action processing]
Next, the special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing relating to the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special action status" (S1501).

When the "special action status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special action status" is "2", the special symbol variation. Processing (S1503) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3", a special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "5", game state setting processing (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby when the special symbol variable display and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

Special design fluctuation processing (S1503) is the processing which is done when the special design is indicated fluctuatingly. The special symbol variation processing will be detailed later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special design confirmation processing will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. A game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to a jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. The special action status is changed to "5" when the jackpot game ends. In addition, when each round game is started, a round number specifying command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . Also, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot pattern related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special action status "4" and controls the jackpot game is the "jackpot game state", and the fact that the special action status "4" is set is the "jackpot game state”.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting the game state to be controlled after the big win game when the big win game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, a high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high-probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104 . In addition, when controlling in the time saving state after the jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, when limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "time saving prescribed number of times") is set to the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating a game state after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the game state setting process.

[Special symbol standby process]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the special figure It is determined whether or not the number of 1 pending is "0" (S1608). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO at S1618), a customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol standby process.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" but the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start When there is one or more storage of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning to mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is read out first, and is based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit determination).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type random number is read out and the jackpot pattern type is determined based on the first jackpot pattern type determination table (jackpot pattern type determination). Then, the jackpot pattern data representing the jackpot pattern type is set in a special buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the pattern designation command indicating the jackpot pattern type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加

Also, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the losing design data representing the losing is set in the special figure buffer, and the design designation command representing the losing is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state (S1652), then proceed to step S1654, If it is not a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), time-saving After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the big win determination result is "big win". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read, and the reach random number is compared with the reach determination table corresponding to the current game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is reach or not.

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the result of reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658) Then proceed to step S1660, if there is no reach (NO in S1656), check the current special figure 1 pending number, step S1652 or step S1653 in either special figure 1 variation pattern determination table From select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss according to the number of special figure 1 reservations (S1657) and then proceed to step S1660.

The game control microcomputer 101, in step S1660, reads out the special figure variation pattern random number, and compares the special figure variation pattern random number to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659, Perform special figure 1 variation pattern determination to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern to the output buffer (S1661), and special figure variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern Time is set to the special action timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

It should be noted that the special action timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the special figure 1 variation start command to be set includes information on the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and the special figure variation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) Contains information on the results (information on the special figure fluctuation pattern, including information on the presence or absence of reach and special figure fluctuation time).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 indicator 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the first reservation in (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reserved number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved indicator 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special action status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and special symbol standby processing is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is finished without executing step S1617.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, the storage of special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 is one or more If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are basically the same processing content as special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) .

Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602), except that the table used in the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since it is the same processing as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609), the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process ( Since this is the same processing as in S1610), the description is omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 indicator 81b to start the variation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the 4th reservation in (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 reservations are digested in the order they were reserved.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 reserved number counter (S1606), and changes the special figure 2 reserved number indicated by the special figure 2 reserved indicator 83b by decreasing "1" (S1607 ), change the special action status to "2" (S1615), and proceed to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of special symbols based on the special figure 1 reservation is performed only when the special figure 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of Toku-zu 2 pending is executed with priority over the digestion of Toku-zu 1 pending. And in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation makes it easier for the player to win a big winning pattern that is more profitable than the lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed with priority over the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation and the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation may be performed in the order in which the reservation occurred regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbols, that is, whether the special symbol variation time set in the special action timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has passed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter=0) (S1701). If the special symbol variation display is not terminated (NO at S1701), the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is terminated (YES at S1701), the special symbol variable display is performed on the special symbol display device 81. is terminated, and a special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or losing special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer at step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure determination time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special action timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the special symbol fluctuation display is finished is output to the buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol determination process (S1504), that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether or not operation counter=0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not terminated (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol stop display is terminated (YES in S1751), the current normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), it proceeds to step S1757, and if it is in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), it proceeds to step S1757. "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving remaining number counter that measures the number of times (time saving remaining number of times) (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1755), proceed to step S1757. YES), the time saving state is shifted to the non-working time saving state (the time saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether or not the special symbol that is currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot pattern (NO in S1758), the special action status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special pattern determination process is finished, and if it is a jackpot pattern (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset ( The normal game state is set.Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0" (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special action status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the jackpot symbol type in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening corresponding to the stopped jackpot pattern is in progress is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. set the time from when the player is done to the start of one round) in the special action timer. Furthermore, according to the type of the jackpot pattern, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot pattern is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The opening command corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stop-displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 43 to 47. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

Also, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the RAM 124 for effect. The performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 when the pachinko game machine PY is powered on.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. It should be noted that the random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the effect contents such as random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination and special figure variation effect pattern determination random numbers, which will be described later.

As an example of a method for updating the determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation production start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening production start command, a round production start, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects), and the sub-drive board. Via 162, the frame lamp 53 is lit (executing various effects by light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (executing various effects by action). In addition, various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, jackpot ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the receive buffer of the effect RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing suitable for the image effect. is output to the sub-drive board 162 . That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs mobile device control processing (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs timer update processing (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control the time relating to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 10msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. Effect control microcomputer 121, in the 10ms timer interrupt process, first performs a received command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis processing will be described later.

The effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing after the received command analysis processing (S4202). In the audio control process, based on the effect content indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect data set in the effect RAM 124, etc., the audio data (data for controlling the output of the sound from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161. is output.

The effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data creation processing after the sound control processing (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, the light emission data is created based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124 and the like.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process, first, from the game control board 100 start winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) received or not, in other words, received starting winning command It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES at S4301), it proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs start winning process in response to the game ball winning the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. FIG. In the start winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 in the RAM 124 for performance. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. The look-ahead effect includes, in addition to a pending notice of displaying a pending icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 outputs a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display section 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the content of the prefetch effect indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect by the image. A sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (performs the prefetch effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted via the sub-drive board 162 (performs the prefetch effect by light emission), and the board movable body It is possible to activate 55k (perform a look-ahead effect by action).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the design designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the design designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the design designation command is not received (NO at S4303), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4305. is stored in the pattern designation command storage unit 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure fluctuation start command is not received (NO in S4305), while proceeding to step S4307, if the special figure fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are determined. , Special figure fluctuation production start processing (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation production is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure fluctuation start command in the special figure fluctuation start command storage unit 127 in the production RAM 124 in the special figure fluctuation production start processing. Next, based on the contents of the stop special figure indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 (type of jackpot symbol, loss special figure) and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed to EZ3, and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol to determine the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special figures and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure variation pattern. In each stop design pattern determination table, a plurality of production designs EZ1 to EZ3 and small designs KZ1 to KZ3 have a random number value for stop design pattern determination (stop design pattern determination) so as to have a predetermined allocation rate (%). value) are distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number with the selected stop symbol pattern table in the stop symbol pattern determination, and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for performance. For example, a combination of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that the special figure variation pattern is a reach-less loss variation, so-called "separate eyes". In addition, if the special figure fluctuation pattern is reach and loss fluctuation, the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are the same, and the middle production pattern EZ2 is different from them. A KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special figure variation pattern is a big hit variation, a combination of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that it becomes a so-called "double eye" according to the production mode and the type of the big hit pattern. .

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 selects a special figure fluctuation production pattern in which the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are associated based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the staying production mode and the special figure fluctuation start command. A special figure variation performance pattern determination table for performing special figure variation performance pattern determination to be determined is selected. A plurality of special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table, one or more special figure fluctuation production pattern has a random number value for special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment value) are distributed. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number counter as a special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number, and special figure based on the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number. Variation performance pattern determination is performed.

In the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number with the selected special figure fluctuation production pattern table, determines the special figure fluctuation production pattern, and determines. Data representing the special figure fluctuation production pattern (special figure fluctuation production pattern data) is set in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation production start command indicating the special figure fluctuation production pattern is stored in the output buffer of the production RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined amount from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a special figure variation effect by the image.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation production start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. In addition to the special figure fluctuation production start command by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation production by the sound output from the speaker 52, the special figure by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53 The contents of the figure fluctuation production and the contents of the special figure fluctuation production by the action performed by the board movable body 55k are included.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, while the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure fluctuation production contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation production start command transmitted to the image control board 140 In response, output the sound from the speaker 52 through the voice control circuit 161 (execute the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound), and emit the frame lamp 53 through the sub-drive board 162 (special figure by light emission (performs the variation performance), and operates the board movable body 55k (performs the special figure variation performance by the action).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is stored in the reception buffer. Production control microcomputer 121, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4307), while proceeding to step S4309, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4307), special figure fluctuation A special figure fluctuation production end process (S4308) for ending the production (stopping the variable display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 and performing stop display) is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the special figure fluctuation production end processing, and appropriately ends the special figure fluctuation production based on the analysis result (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small pattern KZ1 To stop the fluctuation display of ~KZ3) set the special figure fluctuation effect end command to the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, it ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command is stored in the reception buffer. If the game state command is not received (NO in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4311, and if the game state command is received (YES in S4309), the game state command is analyzed. , to specify the game state represented by the game state command, and perform a game state setting process for setting the game state (S4310).

The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 in the game state setting process. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state. Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the high probability high base game state. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “02H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the low probability high base game state.

In step S4311, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command is stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO at S4311), it proceeds to step S4313, and if it has received the customer waiting command (YES at S4311), the customer waiting production standby process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect pattern to the start of the customer waiting effect as the customer waiting effect. Set a timer. Note that the effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has passed. output buffer.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), while proceeding to step S4315, if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the jackpot associated with the start of the opening of the jackpot game Opening effect start processing is performed (S4314).

The performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening performance start processing, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is to be executed, the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern) is selected, and a jackpot opening performance start command for starting the jackpot opening performance in the selected jackpot opening performance pattern is output from the performance RAM 124. set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command is not received (NO in S4315), while proceeding to step S4317, if the round number designation command is received (YES in S4315), the round production start processing is performed along with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect corresponding to the round game to be started from now on, and executes the round effect if it is to be executed. (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO at S4317), while ending the received command analysis process, if the ending command has been received (YES at S4317), the jackpot ending effect start processing accompanying the start of the jackpot game ending ( After performing S4318) and effect mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start processing, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed from now on, and executes it. The performance contents of the jackpot ending performance (jackpot ending performance pattern) are selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In addition, in the effect mode setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot pattern indicated by the ending command (the effect mode is set). control).

For example, when the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot pattern A or the jackpot pattern D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the variable probability production mode suggesting a high probability high base game state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the probability variable effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the background image G120 for probability variation is displayed as the background image, and BGM for probability variation is output as BGM.

When the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot pattern B, jackpot pattern C, or jackpot pattern E, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects either a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state. Set a time-saving production mode that is difficult to determine or impossible to determine. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns ON the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and outputs a time saving effect mode start command indicating that the time saving effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set to When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the time saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the first embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment is composed of a so-called "1 type 2 type mixing machine". In one pachinko game machine PY1, when a special figure 1 lottery is performed mainly when a game ball enters a first start hole 11 and a jackpot is won, a first big prize hole 14, which will be described later, is opened. A specification called "first type (so-called "digipachi type")" in which a jackpot game is executed, and a special figure 2 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball into the second start port 12 as a trigger to make a small hit. When winning, a small winning game that opens the second large winning opening 15 described later is executed, and the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 15 opened in the small winning game moves to a specific area 16 (so-called "V zone" described later) ”) (so-called “V winning”), a specification called “second type (so-called “feather monotype”)” in which a jackpot game is executed is mixed.

Here, FIG. 48 shows a front view of the game board 1 of the pachinko game machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 48, in the game area 6, there are a first big winning device 14D and a second big winning device 15D that can reversibly change between a state where the game ball cannot win and a state where the game ball can win. is provided.

The first big winning device 14D is provided directly below the first start-up winning device 11D. mode) and a special winning mode (open mode) that can be won.

The first AT opening/closing member 14k is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape, and its short side direction is parallel to the front-rear direction and its long side direction is horizontal directly under the first start-up winning device 11D. Along the direction, the right side is higher than the left side, and it is arranged so as to be parallel to the slant direction with a gentle slope, and is configured to be capable of rectilinear movement in the front-rear direction.

In a normal standby state, the front end of the first AT opening/closing member 14k is flush with the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). Then, when the first AT opening/closing member 14k is held in the standby state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the first AT opening/closing member 14k passes in front of the first AT opening/closing member 14k as it is. It moves to the lower side of the first AT opening/closing member 14k.

In addition, the first AT opening/closing member 14k can move forward (protrude forward) from the standby state as an operating state. When the first AT opening/closing member 14k is held in the operating state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the first AT opening/closing member 14k is stopped by the first AT opening/closing member 14k. It moves obliquely downward to the left above the first AT opening/closing member 14k, is collected as it is from a first AT collection port 14h adjacent to the left side of the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and is discharged outside the game area 6. - 特許庁The recovery of the game ball from the first AT recovery port 14h constitutes the winning of the game ball to the first big winning port 14.例文帳に追加

When the first AT opening/closing member 14k is in the operating state, it is possible to collect game balls from the first AT collection port 14h, so the portion where the first AT opening/closing member 14k is arranged in the game area 6 is the first big prize. The mouth 14 shall be constructed. Also, the first AT collection port 14h is assumed to constitute a part of the first big winning port 14 as well. A first big winning hole sensor 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered (won) the first big winning hole 14 is provided in the first AT collection hole 14h.

In this way, the first AT opening/closing member 14k is reversibly changeable between the standby state and the operating state, and when the first AT opening/closing member 14k is in the standby state, the game ball wins the first big prize opening 14. It takes an impossible non-specific mode (closed mode), and when the first AT opening/closing member 14k is in an operating state, the first big winning hole 14 takes a specific mode (open mode) in which game balls can win. In addition, in the first embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out when the player enters the first big prize hole 14 .

The second big prize winning device 15D is provided immediately below the right end of the center decoration 61 and obliquely above the first big prize winning device 14D. It is equipped with a second big prize winning port 15 that can change between a non-specific mode (closed mode) in which game balls cannot win and a specific mode (open mode) in which game balls can win.

The second AT opening/closing member 15k is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate. parallel to each other, and the longitudinal direction thereof is parallel to the inclined direction in which the right side is higher than the left side along the horizontal direction and the slope is gentle, and is configured to be capable of rectilinear movement in the front-rear direction. there is

In a normal standby state, the second AT opening/closing member 15k is in a state in which its front end protrudes from the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). Then, when the second AT opening/closing member 15k is held in the standby state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the second AT opening/closing member 15k is stopped by the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and then the second AT. It moves obliquely downward to the left above the opening/closing member 15k, and further flows downstream of the second AT opening/closing member 15k in the game area 6. - 特許庁

In addition, the second AT opening/closing member 15k can be retracted from the standby state as an operating state. When the second AT opening/closing member 15k is held in the operating state, the front end thereof is flush with the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). The game ball flowing down toward it passes in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k as it is and moves to the lower side of the second AT opening/closing member 15k. Then, the passing of the game ball in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k constitutes the winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 15. - 特許庁

Since the game ball can pass in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k when the second AT opening/closing member 15k is in the operating state, the part where the second AT opening/closing member 15k is arranged in the game area 6 is the second big prize. The mouth 15 shall be constructed. Therefore, the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 15 constitutes winning of the second big winning hole 15 . In addition, at a position immediately below the second AT opening/closing member 15k, there is provided a second large winning hole sensor 15a for detecting that the game ball has entered (won) the second large winning hole 15. A game ball that has passed in front of the 2AT opening/closing member 15k and has moved downward is always detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a.

In this way, the second AT opening/closing member 15k is reversibly changeable between the standby state and the operating state, and when the second AT opening/closing member 15k is in the standby state, the game ball wins the game ball through the second big winning opening 15. It takes a non-specific mode (closed mode) in which (enter) is impossible, and when the second AT opening and closing member 15k is in an operating state, the second big winning port 15 is in a specific mode (open mode) in which a game ball can win (enter). take. In addition, in the first embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out when the player enters the second big prize hole 15 .

Next, the state after the game ball has won (entered) the second big winning hole 15 will be described. The game board 1 is provided with a specific area device 16D that can reach the game ball that has won (entered) the second big prize hole 15, in other words, the game ball that has passed in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k. As shown in FIG. 48, the specific area device 16D is installed substantially below the second AT opening/closing member 15k. Between the second AT opening/closing member 15k and the specific area device 16D, a path 16R (specific area guidance path 16R) is formed for guiding game balls passing in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k to the specific area device 16D. . Therefore, the game ball passing in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k is guided to the specific area device 16D by the specific area guide path 16R.

The specific region device 16D includes an operable distribution member 16k, and a specific state that can be changed between a non-specific mode (closed mode) in which game balls cannot pass through and a specific mode (open mode) in which game balls can pass through the distribution member 16k. region 16;

Although not directly illustrated in FIG. 48, the distribution member 16k is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape, the long side direction of which is parallel to the front-rear direction, and the short side direction of which is the left-right direction. , and is configured to be capable of linear movement in the front-rear direction.

In a normal standby state, the distribution member 16k has a front end protruding from the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). Then, when the distribution member 16k is held in the standby state, the game balls flowing downward from the upper side of the distribution member 16k collide with the distribution member 16k, and then further in the game area 6. It flows downstream from the distribution member 16k.

Also, the distribution member 16k can be retracted from the standby state as an operating state. When the distribution member 16k is held in the operating state, the front end thereof is flush with the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1), so that the distribution member 16k moves downward from the upper side to the lower side. The game ball flowing down passes in front of the distribution member 16k as it is and moves to the lower side of the distribution member 16k. The passage of the game ball before the distribution member 16k constitutes the passage of the game ball through the specific area 16. - 特許庁

When the distribution member 16k is in an operating state, game balls can pass in front of the distribution member 16k. It shall be. A specific area sensor 16a for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V winning") is provided at a position immediately below the distribution member 16k. A game ball that has moved to the lower side of the distribution member 16k is always detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In this way, the distribution member 16k is reversibly changeable between the standby state and the operating state, and when the distribution member 16k is in the standby state, the specific region 16 is a non-specific region through which game balls cannot pass. It takes a mode (closed mode), and when the distribution member 16k is in an operating state, the specific area 16 takes a specific mode (open mode) through which game balls can pass.

Further, in the first embodiment, the second start-up winning device 12D is provided on the right side of the lower half of the center decorative body 61 in the vertical direction substantially in the center and substantially above the second AT opening/closing member 15k.

The electric tube opening/closing member 12k is formed in a substantially vertically long rectangular plate shape. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the direction of inclination which is high and has a gentle slope, and is configured to be capable of rectilinear movement in the front-rear direction.

The front end of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is flush with the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1) in a normal standby state. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the standby state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k passes in front of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k as it is. It moves to the lower side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

In addition, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k can move forward (protrude forward) from the standby state as an operating state. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the operating state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is stopped by the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. It moves obliquely downward to the left above the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, is collected as it is from the electric chew collection port 12h adjacent to the left side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6. - 特許庁The recovery of the game ball from the electric chew recovery port 12h constitutes the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加

When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in an operating state, game balls can be collected from the electric chew opening/closing member 12h. 12. It is also assumed that the electric tube recovery port 12h also constitutes a part of the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. In addition, a second starting hole sensor 12a for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 12 (winning a prize) is provided in the electric chew collection hole 12h.

In this way, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k can be reversibly changed between the standby state and the operating state, and when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the standby state, the second starting port 12 is opened so that the game ball does not win a prize. A possible non-specific mode (closed mode) is taken, and when the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is in an operating state, the second starting port 12 takes a specific mode (open mode) in which a game ball can win.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center of the center decorative body 61 in the vertical direction and substantially above the second starting port 12 (the electric chew open/close member 12k). The right game area 6B is configured so that game balls can flow down to the left and right sides of the gate 13. It is constructed so that game balls reach the gate 13 most frequently. In other words, the right game area 6B is configured so that most of the game balls that are shot to the right and enter the right game area 6B, in other words, most of the game balls that reach the right side of the center decoration 61 pass through the gate 13. there is

Further, the right game area 6B is configured so that game balls passing through the gate 13 always reach the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. Therefore, when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the operating state, most of the game balls that have entered the right game area 6B are blocked by the electric chew opening/closing member 12k and are collected as they are from the electric chew opening/closing member 12h. As a result, the second AT opening/closing member 15k cannot be reached. It should be noted that the game ball passing through the gate 13 may not reach the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k in some cases.

Furthermore, the game ball that has passed in front of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k in the standby state, in other words, the game ball that has passed through the predetermined position where the second start opening 12 is formed in the game area 6 is moved to the second AT opening/closing member 15k. However, in the right game area 6B (game board unit YU), the game ball that has entered the right game area 6B is in front of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k (predetermined position where the second start opening 12 is formed). ) to reach the second AT opening/closing member 15k is 1 second. However, this average value can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, the right game area 6B (game board unit YU) enters the right game area 6B and collides with the second AT opening/closing member 15k in the standby state, and the game ball that has moved downstream from there collides with the first AT opening/closing member 14k. configured to be reachable.

As described above, when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, the first AT opening/closing member 14k, the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and the distribution member 16k are in the operating state, the winning to the second starting port 12 and the first big winning Winning to the opening 14, winning to the second big winning opening 15, and passing through the specific area 16 are possible. In the following, the ability to enter the second starting slot 12, enter the first grand prize slot 14, enter the second grand prize slot 15, and pass through the specific area 16 will be referred to as "open". There is also On the other hand, the impossibility of winning the second starting gate 12, winning the first big winning gate 14, winning the second big winning gate 15, and passing through the specific area 16 is called "closed". There is also

Next, the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 in the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 in the pachinko game machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 49, the game control board 100 is connected to the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s so that the signals output from the game control board 100 can be input.

The 1st AT solenoid 14s is also connected to the 1st AT opening/closing member 14k, driven based on a signal from the game control board 100, and operates the 1st AT opening/closing member 14k to operate the standby state and the operating state (first big prize The mouth 14 is switched between a winning mode (closed) and a winning mode (open). The 2nd AT solenoid 15s is also connected to the 2nd AT opening/closing member 15k, driven based on a signal from the game control board 100, and operates the 2nd AT opening/closing member 15k to operate the standby state and the operating state (the second big prize The mouth 15 is switched between a winning mode (closed) and a winning mode (open). The distribution solenoid 16s is also connected to the distribution member 16k, is driven based on a signal from the game control board 100, and operates the distribution member 16k to switch between the standby state and the operating state (not passing through the specific region 16). Toggle between possible mode (closed) and traversable mode (open).

Also, the game control board 100 is connected to the above-described first big winning hole sensor 14a, second big winning hole sensor 15a, and specific area sensor 16a so as to output signals to the game control board 100. FIG.

When the game ball is detected, the first big winning hole sensor 14a outputs a signal (first big winning hole detection signal) indicating that the game ball has won the first big winning hole 14 to the game control board 100. When the second big winning hole sensor 15a detects the game ball, it outputs a signal (second big winning hole detection signal) indicating that the game ball has won the second big winning hole 15 to the game control board 100. When the game ball is detected, the specific area sensor 16a outputs to the game control board 100 a signal (specific area detection signal) indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning).

Next, game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY1, only one kind of normal probability state is set as the game state related to the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot determination. On the other hand, as a game state related to the winning ease of the second starting port 12, similarly to the basic embodiment, a non-time-saving state (low base state) and a time-saving state (high base state) are set. Therefore, hereinafter, the low-probability low-base game state is referred to as "normal game state", and the low-probability high-base game state is simply referred to as "time-saving state".

Next, the probability that it is determined to be "hit" in the hit determination according to the first embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the auxiliary game will be described. In the first embodiment, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the hit determination in the normal game state (non-time saving state) is set to 1%, and the probability of being determined as "hit" in the hit determination in the time saving state is 99%. is set to In addition, the normal diagram fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 30 seconds regardless of the hit determination result, and the normal diagram fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 3 seconds regardless of the hit determination result.

Furthermore, the number of opening times of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game based on the stop display of winning symbols in the normal game state (non-time-saving state) is 1, and the opening time is set to 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, the number of opening times of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game based on the stop display of winning symbols in the time saving state is one time, and the opening time is set to 3.0 seconds.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 continues to shoot the game ball with the left hand in the normal game state and wins the first start opening 11, while continuing to shoot the game ball with the right hand in the time saving state and the second start opening. It is configured to make it easier to win 12.

Next, the jackpot determination according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 50(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot determination according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50 (A), as a jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (first jackpot determination table) according to the special figure 1 used in jackpot determination (first jackpot determination) based on winning a prize to the first start port 11 ), and a jackpot determination table (second jackpot determination table) related to the special figure 2 used in jackpot determination (second jackpot determination) based on winning a prize to the second start port 12 are provided.

According to the first big win determination table, the first big win determination determines either a big win or a loss. On the other hand, according to the second big win determination table, in the second big win determination, any one of big win, small win, and losing is determined. As will be described later, when a small hit is won, a stop display of a special figure 2 showing a small hit is executed, and a small hit game is executed according to the stop display. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the big winning game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(A), in the first big win determination, the probability of being determined as a big win is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the second big win determination, the probability of being determined as a big win is set to 1/319, and the probability of being determined as a small win is set to 80/319 (≈1/4). As in the basic embodiment, in each jackpot determination table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is shown in FIG. They are distributed as appropriate so as to achieve the selectivity shown. However, the selection rate for the big win and the selection rate for the small win are not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, in the first big win determination, a small win may be included as the big win determination result. Alternatively, in the second big win determination, the big win determination result may not include the big win.

Next, the big-hit symbol and the small-hit symbol according to the first embodiment will be described. As described above, the jackpot pattern is a special pattern that suggests the type of jackpot as well as the winning of the jackpot. The jackpot pattern is determined by the jackpot pattern type determination, and the jackpot pattern type determination is performed using a jackpot pattern type determination table. FIG. 50(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50(B), three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, are provided as the jackpot patterns of special figure 1. FIG. According to the jackpot pattern type determination table related to the special figure 1, the jackpot pattern A is selected with a probability of 10%, the jackpot pattern B is selected with a probability of 45%, and the jackpot pattern C is selected with a probability of 45%. In addition, as the special figure 2, one type of jackpot pattern, the jackpot pattern D, is provided. According to the jackpot design classification determination table according to the special figure 2, the jackpot design D is selected with a probability of 100%.

In addition, the small winning design is a special design that suggests the kind of small winning along with the winning of the small winning. In the special figure variable display when the small hit is won, the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed as a derivation of the result of the big hit determination. The small winning symbol is determined by the small winning symbol type determination, and the small winning symbol type determination is performed using the small winning symbol type determination table. FIG.50(C) is a figure which shows the structural example of the small hit symbol classification determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50(C), two types of small winning designs, ie, a small winning design A and a small winning design B are provided as the special figure 2 small winning designs. According to the small winning symbol type determination table according to the special figure 2, the small winning symbol A is selected with a probability of 50%, and the small winning symbol B is selected with a probability of 50%.

In the first embodiment, in addition to the special symbol random number, the jackpot symbol type random number, the reach random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol 2 related determination information includes a small A winning pattern type random number is also included. Therefore, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, a small winning symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) relating to the small winning symbol type random number is provided, and a small winning symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) is provided. Like the special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T) and the jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), it is updated in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). Then, in step S211, the game control microcomputer 101 acquires a small hit symbol type random number as the special figure 2 related determination information, and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104. Although the range of small hit symbol type random numbers can be set as appropriate, it is set to "0 to 255" in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the small hit design type determination table, the small hit design type which is the result of the small hit design type determination, the determination value of the small hit design type random number (small hit design type random number determination value) is shown in FIG. They are distributed as appropriate so as to achieve the selectivity shown. Therefore, as will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired small winning symbol type random number with the small winning symbol type determination table to determine the type of the small winning symbol.

In addition, the number of jackpot design types and the number of small hit design types related to special figures 1 and 2, the selection rate of each jackpot design type, and the selection rate of each small hit design type are the first embodiment is not limited to , and may be set appropriately.

Next, a jackpot game according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, and the game ball that wins the second big prize opening 15 opened in the small hit game executed after the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed. It is executed when passing through the specific area 16 (V winning). Therefore, the jackpot game constituent elements constituting the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, the types of the special symbols stopped and displayed, more specifically, the jackpot symbols that trigger the execution of the jackpot game. It is associated with the type and the type of the small hit symbol.

Even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16, the big winning game is not executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the direct execution trigger of the big winning game is that the game ball passes through the specific area 16, but if the game ball does not enter the second big winning port 15, the game ball will The specific area 16 cannot be passed through, and winning to the second large prize winning port 15 is possible when the second large prize winning port 15 is open, and the opening of the second large prize winning port 15 is a small winning game. , the stop display of the small winning pattern is also included in the execution opportunity of the big winning game.

Furthermore, hereinafter, stopping display of the small winning pattern will be referred to as "getting a small hit/become a small winning", and stopping display of the big winning pattern and passing the game ball through the specific area 16 will be referred to as "making a big hit". / It is sometimes called a big hit.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game constituent element is associated with whether or not it is a jackpot game related to a "limiter" described later. Although the details of the "limiter" will be described later, in the first embodiment, once after shifting from the normal game state to the time saving state, before the special figure variable display can be executed in the normal game state, the time saving state The number of times of the jackpot game executed based on the stop display of the jackpot symbols and the stop display of the small hit symbols is limited to two. This limited number of times (2 times) is called a "limiter". Then, the big winning game executed based on the stop display of the big winning symbol in the second time saving state and the stopped display of the small winning symbol corresponds to the big winning game related to the limiter.

In the following, the jackpot game related to the limiter is referred to as "limiter jackpot game", and the jackpot game that is not the jackpot game associated with the limiter is referred to as "non-limiter jackpot game". Also, reaching the limit number of times is referred to as "activation of limiter/activation of limiter".

FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table associated with each special symbol type when the jackpot game corresponds to a non-limiter jackpot game, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table associated with each special symbol type when the jackpot game corresponds to the limiter jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 51(A) and FIG. 51(B), the number of executions of the round game in the jackpot game associated with each special symbol type is regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is related to the limiter. constant. Specifically, the number of executions of the round game related to the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game") is 4 times, and the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), and the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game") are executed 8 times, and A jackpot game associated with a jackpot pattern D (hereinafter also referred to as a "fourth jackpot game"), a jackpot game associated with a small hit pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as a "fifth jackpot game"), and a small hit The number of executions of the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game") associated with the symbol B is 10 times.

In addition, the fifth jackpot game is a small hit game executed based on the stop display of the small hit pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"). It is executed in response to the end of the 1 small winning game. On the other hand, in the sixth jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the specific region 16 in the jackpot game executed based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), the It is executed in response to the end of the two-small winning game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game components include the types of big winning openings to be opened. As shown in FIG. 51 (A) and FIG. 51 (B), regardless of whether it is a jackpot game related to the limiter, and regardless of the special symbol type, in all round games of all jackpot games, The first big winning opening 14 is set to open. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B), all rounds of all jackpot games, regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is related to the limiter, and regardless of the special symbol type. Regarding the game, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 in the round game is set to 1, the time for each opening (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the time for closing after opening (closed time) is set to 2.0 seconds. In addition, closing time is not set for the last round game in each jackpot game. This is because, after the opening of the first big winning hole 14 related to the last round game is finished, the ending in which the first big winning hole 14 is kept closed is performed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the opening time of all jackpot games ("OP time" in FIG. 51) is 10.0, regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is related to the limiter, and regardless of the special symbol type. set to seconds. On the other hand, for limiter jackpot games, the ending time of all jackpot games (“ED time” in FIG. 51) is set to 10.0 seconds regardless of the special symbol type, but for non-limiter jackpot games is set to 0.0 second for the ending time of all jackpot games regardless of the special symbol type. In other words, in the limiter jackpot game, the ending is executed after the last round game regardless of the special symbol type, but in the non-limiter jackpot game, the ending is executed when the last round game ends regardless of the special symbol type. The jackpot game ends as it is without being executed. As will be described later, in the first embodiment, the non-limiter jackpot game is positioned as a jackpot game in the middle stage until the limiter is activated, and the ending in the jackpot game in the middle stage is not executed. This is to make a set of a plurality of jackpot games including the jackpot game according to the above look like one jackpot game.

Next, a small winning game according to the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls a small winning game using a small winning game control table. The small winning game control table includes a small winning game large winning mouth control table related to control of the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 14, second big winning mouth 15), and a small winning game related to control of the specific area 16 There is a specific area control table.

The small winning game large winning opening control table has an element (first small winning game component) that constitutes a small winning game related to the opening and closing of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15). stored. The first small winning game component includes the type of big winning mouth to be opened, the number of openings of the big winning mouth in the small winning game, the opening time (opening pattern) related to each opening, the time to close until the next opening (closed time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time). The small winning game large winning opening control table (first small winning game component) is associated with the type of special symbol, more specifically, the type of small winning symbol.

FIG. 52(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning game big winning opening control table related to each small winning symbol type. As shown in FIG. 52(A), the small winning game big winning opening control table is set to be the same regardless of the small winning symbol type. That is, the first small winning game and the second small winning game are controlled in the same way for the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 14 and the second big winning opening 15). Furthermore, regardless of the small winning symbol type, the second big winning opening 15 is set to be opened for all openings of all small winning games.

Further, the number of openings of the second big winning opening 15 in the small winning game associated with each small winning symbol type is set to 15 times. The opening time of the second big winning opening 15 for all 15 times in the small winning game associated with each small winning symbol type is set to 0.12 seconds. However, the closing time from the end of the opening of the second large winning opening 15 of the small winning game associated with each small winning symbol type to the start of the next opening is the opening of the second large winning opening 15. Varies by order. Specifically, for the small winning game associated with any small winning symbol type, the closing time after the first opening of the second big winning opening 15 is set to 2.5 seconds, and the second opening is set. The post closing time is set to 1.5 seconds and the closing time after the 3rd to 14th opening is set to 0.6 seconds. The reason why the closing time of the second large winning opening 15 related to the small winning game in the time saving state differs depending on the opening order of the second large winning opening 15 will be described later.

Furthermore, the opening time of the small winning game (“OPO time” in FIG. 52) is set to 3.0 seconds regardless of the small winning symbol type. Also, the ending time of the small winning game is set to 2.0 seconds regardless of the small winning symbol type.

Next, the opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the small winning game, that is, the control related to the operation of the distribution member 16k will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 uses a small winning game specific area control table to control the opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the small winning game, that is, the operation of the distribution member 16k. The small winning game specific area control table stores an element (second small winning game component) that constitutes a small winning game related to the opening and closing of the specific area 16 . In the second small winning game component, the time to open the specific area 16 held in the closed state based on the time when the small winning game was started (operating the distribution member 16k held in the standby state state), and the time to close the specific area 16 held in the open state (the time to return the sorting member 16k in the operating state to the standby state). The small winning game specific area control table (second small winning game component) is associated with the type of special symbol, specifically, the small winning symbol type.

FIG. 52(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning game specific area control table related to each small winning symbol type. As shown in FIG. 52(B), the small winning game specific area control table is set to be the same regardless of the small winning symbol type. That is, opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the first small winning game (operation of the distribution member 16k) and opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the second small winning game (operation of the distribution member 16s) are controlled in the same manner.

In the first small winning game and the second small winning game, the specific area 16 is opened when 3.0 seconds have passed since the small winning game was started. This time corresponds to the time when the opening ends, in other words, the time when the first opening of the second big prize winning port 15 starts (see FIG. 52(A)). Then, in the first small winning game and the second small winning game, the specific area 16 is closed when 18.0 seconds have passed since the small winning game was started. This time corresponds to the time when 2.0 seconds have passed since the last opening of the second big prize winning opening 15 (see FIG. 52(A)). In this way, the specific area 16 is opened at the same timing as the first opening of the second big winning opening 15, and at the timing when 2.0 seconds have elapsed after the last opening of the second big winning opening 15 is finished. to close.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the control contents of the small winning game will be described. As described above, in the first small winning game and the second small winning game, opening and closing of the second big winning opening 15 and opening and closing of the specific area 16 are controlled in the same manner. In the following, the first small winning game and the second small winning game may be simply referred to as "small winning game". FIG. 53 is a time chart showing the control contents of the small winning game. In FIG. 53, the second big winning opening 15 is denoted as "second AT", the specific area 16 is denoted as "VAT", and the opening of the small winning game is denoted as "OP". , the ending of the small winning game is referred to as "ED".

When "a small winning pattern (a small winning pattern A, a small winning pattern B)" is stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special figure 2, a small winning game is performed. As shown in FIG. 53, in response to the start of the small winning game, the second big winning opening 15 is first opened so that the closed state is maintained. This opening continues until 3.0 seconds have passed since it started. When the opening is finished, the first opening of the second big prize winning opening 15 is started. The first opening of the second big winning opening 15 continues until 0.12 seconds have passed since it started.

When the first opening of the second big prize winning port 15 is completed and the second big prize winning port 15 is closed, the closing continues for 2.5 seconds, and when 2.5 seconds have passed since the start of the closing, the second big prize winning port 15 is closed. The second opening of the second prize winning opening 15 is started. The second opening of the second big prize winning opening 15 also continues until 0.12 seconds have passed since it started.

When the second big prize winning port 15 is closed for the second time after the second big prize winning port 15 is opened, the closing continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the closing, the second big prize winning port 15 is closed. The opening of the 2nd prize-winning opening 15 for the third time is started. After that, the opening of the second prize winning opening 15 for 0.12 seconds and the subsequent closing for 0.6 seconds are repeated 12 times, and finally the 15th opening is performed. The fifteenth opening of the second big prize winning opening 15 also continues until 0.12 seconds have passed since it started. Then, when the final (15th) opening of the second large prize winning port 15 is completed, the second large prize winning port 15 is closed and an ending is performed in which the closed state is maintained. This ending continues until 2.0 seconds have passed since it started, and the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game) ends when the ending ends.

Thus, in the small winning game, the second big winning opening 15 can be opened 15 times in total. The opening time of the second big winning hole 15 in the small winning game is all 0.12 seconds, but the closing time between the first opening and the second opening is 2.5 seconds. The closing time between the first and third openings is 1.5 seconds, and the shorter and common closing times thereafter are 0.6 seconds. Therefore, during the period until the opening of the second big winning hole 15 for the third time in the small winning game, the opening frequency of the second big winning hole 15 is relatively low, in other words, the unit of the second big winning hole 15 The opening time per hour is relatively short, and the opening frequency of the second big winning hole 15 is relatively high in the period after the opening of the second big winning hole 15 for the third time in the small winning game, in other words, the second big winning hole 15. The opening time per unit time of the big winning opening 15 is relatively long. That is, the period after the opening of the second big winning opening 15 for the third time in the small winning game can be regarded as the period in which the opening of the second big winning opening 15 is performed in earnest. Therefore, during the period from the start of the first opening of the second large winning opening 15 to immediately before the third opening of the second large winning opening 15 in the small winning game, the opening of the second large winning opening 15 is passive, or The period from the start of the third opening of the second big winning opening 15 to the end of the 15th opening is referred to as the "small winning open passive period" that is executed informally. It may also be referred to as a "small win open positive period" in which the open is actively or fully executed.

Further, the opening of the specific area 16 related to the small winning game is started at the timing when the opening is finished and the opening of the second big winning opening 15 is started for the first time. After that, while the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 15 are repeatedly performed, the opening of the specific area 16 is continuously performed. Then, when 18.0 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, in other words, at the timing when the ending ends, the opening of the specific area 16 ends and the specific area 16 closes.

In addition, like the round game of the jackpot game, the number of game balls that can be won is defined for the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game). This number is also referred to as "prescribed winning number", and in the first embodiment, the prescribed winning number for the small winning game is prescribed to be 10, which is the same as the prescribed winning number for the round game. Therefore, when 10 game balls enter the second big winning hole 15 in the small winning game, the second big winning hole 15 is closed at that time, and the ending starts from that time.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the interference of the auxiliary game with respect to the winning of the second big winning opening 15 in the small winning game will be described. FIG. 54 is a time chart for explaining a specific example of the interference of the auxiliary game with respect to the winning to the second big winning hole 15 in the small winning game. In addition, in FIG. 54, the second starting hole 12 is denoted as "electric chew", the second big winning hole 15 is denoted as "second AT", and the game ball passing through the specific area 16 It is written as "V prize", the opening of the small winning game is written as "OP", and the ending of the small winning game is written as "ED".

As described above, the second starting hole 12 and the second big winning hole 15 are provided in the right game area 6B, and the second starting hole 12 is arranged on the upstream side of the second big winning hole 15 . Then, the second starting port 12 is opened by operating the electric chew opening/closing member 12k in the auxiliary game (allowing the winning to the second starting port 12), but on the other hand, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the operating state. , the game ball about to pass through the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is prevented from flowing downstream by the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

Here, if the handle 72k continues to be operated, one game ball is shot at a cycle of about 0.6 seconds, and most of the game balls entering the right game area 6B pass through the gate 13, and in the time saving state , Since the probability of being determined to be "hit" in the hit determination related to the normal drawing lottery is 99%, in a situation where the ball is continuously fired to the right, the period during which the second start port 12 is closed, It can be a period during which the normal map variable display is performed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the closing of the second starting port 12 corresponding to the normal figure variable display for 3 seconds and the opening of the second starting port 12 for 3 seconds related to the auxiliary game can be repeated. Therefore, a game ball that passes in front of the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k during the 3-second period in which the second starting port 12 is closed becomes a game ball that can win the second big winning port 15.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the average value of the time from when the game ball entering the right game area 6B passes through the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to when it reaches the second AT opening/closing member 15k is 1 second, the second starting port 12 is opened. (Electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the operating state) The period delayed by 1 second is the period in which the game ball cannot reach the second big winning hole 15, in other words, the second big winning hole 15 This is the period during which the winning of the prize is prohibited. Therefore, hereinafter, the period during which the winning of the second prize-winning opening 15 is inhibited will be referred to as a "second AT winning inhibition period".

By the way, even if the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the time saving state and the small winning game starts, the time saving state continues as it is. Then, in the small winning game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), the time saving state is shifted to the normal game state. Therefore, even if the small winning game starts, until the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), the second AT winning inhibition period lasting 3 seconds occurs at 3-second intervals. Therefore, although the game ball cannot be efficiently entered into the second large winning hole 15, after the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), it becomes a normal game state (non-time saving state), and the unit The opening time of the second starting port 12 per hour is shortened, in detail, the opening time of the second starting port 12 related to the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds, the normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the hit determination Since the probability of being determined to be "hit" is extremely low at 1%, it is possible to efficiently win the game ball into the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that even when the second starting port 12 is open, even if the state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal game state, the second starting port 12 related to the auxiliary game started before the game ball passes through the specific area 16 Since the opening time is 3.0 seconds, the opening of the second starting port 12 continues until 3.0 seconds have elapsed since the start. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 of the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds from the auxiliary game that starts first after the game ball passes through the specific area 16.

Further, in the small winning game, the time for closing the second big winning hole 15 after the first opening is set to 2.5 seconds, and the time for closing the second big winning hole 15 after opening for the second time. is set to 1.5 seconds. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, when the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 to win the second large winning opening 15 by opening the second large winning opening 15 for the first time in the small winning game, there The number of openings of the second large prize winning port 15 is one from the time the second large prize winning port 15 is opened until the full-scale opening of the second large prize winning port 15 (active small winning opening period) starts, and the second opening is interposed, but it is substantially Since there is a closing period of the second big winning opening 15 that extends to 4.0 seconds, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, the auxiliary game related to the time saving state is being executed and the second starting opening 12 is Even if it is opened, the opening of the second starting opening 12 is completed before the full-scale opening of the second big winning opening 15 (small winning opening positive period) starts. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of the winning of the game ball to the second big winning opening 15 in the small winning game. Furthermore, in the small winning game, the opening of the second large winning opening 15 after the second closing of the second large winning opening 15 is performed 13 times, so in the small winning game, the game ball can be efficiently placed in the second position. It is possible to win a prize in the big prize opening 15 .

Furthermore, after the first opening of the second big prize opening 15 is completed and before the full-scale opening of the second big prize opening 15 (small hit opening positive period) starts, the second second big prize Since the opening of the opening 15 is performed, even if the game ball could not win by opening the second big winning opening 15 for the first time, opening the second big winning opening 15 for the second time makes the game ball the second big winning opening. It is possible to win a prize through the prize opening 15 . In this case, when the winning game ball passes through the specific area 16 during the opening of the second big winning hole 15 for the second time, the normal game state starts from that time. After the opening of the second big winning hole 15 for the second time, the second big winning hole 15 is closed for a time longer than the active small winning opening period. Therefore, even if the auxiliary game in the time-saving state is started after the second big winning hole 15 is opened for the second time, the loss of the winning of the game ball to the second big winning hole 15 can be reduced.

Thus, in the small winning game, the small winning opening negative period in which the opening of the second large winning opening 15 is negative is performed first, and the opening of the second large winning opening 15 is positive. done later. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of winning of the game ball to the second big winning hole 15. - 特許庁Furthermore, most of the game balls that have entered the second big winning hole 15 can pass through the specific area 16. When it is necessary to be equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, it is possible to reduce the loss of winning of the game ball to the second big winning hole 15, so that this condition can be easily satisfied.

Next, the game state to which the pachinko gaming machine PY1 newly shifts with the end of the jackpot game, and the termination conditions related to each game state will be described. In the first embodiment, the game state to be newly shifted with the end of the jackpot game, and the end condition related to each game state are the special symbols caused by the jackpot game, and the game when the special symbols are stopped and displayed. associated with the state.

The big winning game is executed when the big winning pattern is stopped and displayed, and when the small winning pattern is stopped and the game ball that wins the second big winning hole 15 in the small winning game passes through the specific area 16. be done. Therefore, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not executed, so the direct trigger for the big winning game is that the game ball passes through the specific area 16. However, since the opening of the second big winning hole 15 is based on the small winning game, the stop display of the small winning symbol is also included in the special symbols caused by the big winning game.

Also, the stop display of the jackpot pattern A and the stop display of the jackpot pattern A and the execution of the first jackpot game may be referred to as "jackpot 1". Similarly, the jackpot pattern B, the jackpot pattern C, and the jackpot pattern D are stop-displayed, and the jackpot pattern B, the jackpot pattern C, and the jackpot pattern D are stop-displayed for the second jackpot game, the third jackpot game, and the fourth jackpot. The execution of the game may be referred to as "jackpot 2", "jackpot 3", and "jackpot 4". Furthermore, the game ball that has won the second big winning port 15 in the first small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol A passes through the specific area 16, and the fifth big winning game is executed after the passage. is sometimes referred to as "jackpot 5". Similarly, the game ball that has won the second big winning port 15 in the second small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol B passes through the specific area 16, and after the passage, the sixth big winning game is executed. This is sometimes referred to as "jackpot 6".

FIG. 55(A) shows the type of special symbols stopped and displayed in the normal game state (special symbol type), the game state that shifts with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the end of the game state It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game state setting table representing the relationship with the conditions, FIG. 55 (B) corresponds to the special symbol type (special symbol type) stopped and displayed in the time saving state, and the special symbol type. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game state setting table showing relationship with the game state which changes with the completion|finish of the big-hit game, and the end conditions concerning a game state.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), when the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in the normal game state are the jackpot pattern A, the jackpot pattern D, and the small hit pattern A, the jackpot game corresponding to the special pattern type (the 1 jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) is completed, the state shifts to a time saving state (low probability high base game state). An end condition is set in this time-saving state. The end condition is configured by executing the special figure 2 variable display 99 times. Therefore, the time-saving state in which the jackpot pattern A, the jackpot pattern D, and the small hit pattern A are stopped and displayed in the normal game state and then shifts with the end of the jackpot game is special without the jackpot game being executed. It can be continued until the FIG. 2 variable display is executed 99 times. That is, the prescribed number of time reduction states (time reduction prescribed number of times) to be shifted with the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot pattern A, the jackpot pattern D, and the small hit pattern A in the normal game state is 99 times. is.

Also, when the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in the normal game state are the jackpot pattern B and the small hit pattern B, at the end of the jackpot game (second jackpot game, sixth jackpot game) corresponding to the special pattern type Along with this, it shifts to a time-saving state (low-probability high-base game state). An end condition is set in this time-saving state. The end condition is configured by executing the special figure 2 variable display once. Therefore, the time-saving state in which the jackpot pattern B and the small hit pattern B are stopped and displayed in the normal game state and then shifts with the end of the jackpot game is the special figure 2 variable display without the jackpot game being executed. is executed once. That is, the prescribed number of time reduction states (time reduction prescribed number of times) that shifts with the end of the big winning game executed by the stop display of the big winning symbol B and the small winning symbol B in the normal game state is one.

Furthermore, when the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the normal game state is the jackpot symbol C, with the end of the jackpot game (third jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type, the normal game state (low probability low base game state). And, no end condition is set in this normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in the time saving state are jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, jackpot pattern C, jackpot pattern D, small jackpot pattern A, and jackpot pattern B. In some cases, in other words, no matter which jackpot pattern and small hit pattern are the types of special patterns to be stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the jackpot game corresponding to the special pattern type (first jackpot game, second jackpot game , 3rd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game, and 6th jackpot game) are completed, the state shifts to a time saving state (low probability high base game state). An end condition is set in this time-saving state. The end condition is configured by executing the special figure 2 variable display 99 times. Therefore, in the time saving state, the special figure 2 variable display is 99 without the jackpot game being executed in the time saving state that shifts with the end of the jackpot game executed by stopping and displaying the jackpot pattern and the small hit pattern in the time saving state. It can continue until it is executed twice. That is, the specified number of times (time saving specified number of times) of the time saving state that shifts with the end of the big winning game executed by the stop display of the big winning symbols and the small winning symbols in the time saving state is 99 times.

In this way, when the jackpot pattern and the small hit pattern are stopped and displayed in the time saving state, regardless of the types of the jackpot pattern and the small hit pattern, the specified number of times of the time saving is set to 99 as the jackpot game ends. It is designed to shift to a shorter working hours state. However, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, after shifting to the time saving state once, until the special figure variable display is executable in the normal game state, the stop display of the jackpot symbol in the time saving state or the small hit When the big win game is executed twice by the stop display of the symbols, the limiter is activated, and the state is shifted to the normal game state with the end of the big win game. That is, when the executed jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, priority is given to the relationship between the special symbol type based on the game state setting table and the game state to be shifted with the end of the jackpot game, and the , the normal game state is set.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the time saving state may occur due to an occurrence opportunity different from the jackpot. The occurrence opportunity other than this jackpot is that the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times without a jackpot in the normal game state. Although this specific number of times can be set as appropriate, it is set to 800 times in the first embodiment.

In the normal game state, when the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times, the time saving state is entered when the special figure variable display according to the specific number of times is completed (the stop-displayed losing pattern is determined). In the following, ``the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times without hitting the jackpot in the normal game state'', which triggers the occurrence of the time saving state, is referred to as ``reaching the ceiling'', and the ``specific number'' is referred to as the ``ceiling''. It is sometimes called

In addition, the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 99 times without hitting the jackpot. That is, the prescribed number of times of working hours reduction related to the working hour saving state is 99 times. Therefore, aside from the occurrence opportunity, there are 99 times and 1 time in the prescribed number of times of time saving in the time saving state. In the following, the time saving state in which the specified number of times of time saving is 99 times is sometimes referred to as "advantageous time saving state", and the time saving state of one time saving time is sometimes referred to as "disadvantageous time saving state".

Next, the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing the main game flow executed in the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1, a normal game state (low-probability, low-base game state) is set as the game state, and a normal effect mode is set as the effect mode, which suggests a normal game state. be. In the pachinko game machine PY1, the game progresses in this normal game state, and the situation in which the normal effect mode is executed in the normal game state is the starting point of the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1.

In the normal game state constituted by the non-time-saving state, a game aiming at winning a jackpot in a special figure 1 lottery based on the winning is mainly performed by shooting the game ball with a left hand to win the first start port 11.例文帳に追加. When the special figure 1 lottery is executed, the special figure 1 variable display is performed. When a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 variable display, but the jackpot patterns related to the special figure 1 include a jackpot pattern A, a jackpot pattern B, and a jackpot pattern C. .

Here, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is performed (when the jackpot is 1), the first jackpot game is executed (“1” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). In this case, there is a high possibility that the three jackpot games including the first jackpot game will be executed continuously (three jackpot games can be executed continuously). rich), and a total of 24 rounds of play are likely to be played. The reason is explained below.

When the stop display of the jackpot pattern A is performed in the normal game state (when the jackpot hits 1), along with the end of the first jackpot game, the time saving specified number of times is 99 times (advantageous time saving state), and the time saving state. The production mode is entered (circled "4" in FIG. 56).

Here, it is possible to win the second starting hole 12 by shooting the game ball with right-handed hitting, rather than winning the first starting hole 11 by continuing to shoot the game ball with left-handed hitting in the normal game state. It is configured so that it is easier to continue shooting game balls in a time-saving state to hit the second start port 12 to win a prize, and when a big win is made, the game balls can be acquired in the big win game. From the viewpoint of the game state to be shifted after the jackpot game, the special figure 2 lottery tends to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery (Fig. 50 (A), Fig. 50 (B), Fig. 50 (C), FIG. 51, FIG. 55)), in the time saving state, the second start port 12 is awarded, and a special figure 2 lottery based on the winning is made to win a small hit A game that aims to make a big hit is centered.

Here, the probability of being determined as a “small hit” in the jackpot determination related to the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state is 80/319 (≒ 1/4), and the probability of being determined as a “big hit” is 1/ Since it is 319, the denominator "about 4" when the probability of being determined as a "small hit" in the jackpot determination is expressed as a fraction with the number of times of saving time "99 times" related to the advantageous time saving state. In the state, there is a high possibility of winning a small hit (it is rich to win a small hit). The small winning symbols related to the special figure 2 include a small winning symbol A and a small winning symbol B, but even if any of the small winning symbols is stopped and displayed, a small winning game consisting of the same control contents is executed. be done.

The pachinko game machine PY1 is basically configured so that the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 (unless there is a serious problem) when the game ball is continuously shot with the right hand in the small winning game. there is When the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a fifth jackpot game or a sixth jackpot game consisting of the same control content is executed according to the end of the small hit game (circled in FIG. 5"). Then, with the end of the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game, the time saving specified number of times becomes a time saving state (advantageous time saving state) of 99 times again, and the time saving production mode (surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56) (6).

Even in the advantageous time saving state again, the prescribed number of times of shortening is 99 times, and the probability of being judged as "small hit" in the jackpot judgment related to the special drawing 2 lottery is 80/319 (≒ 1/4), "jackpot" Since the probability of being determined is 1/319, in an advantageous time saving state, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that a small hit will be won, and the 5th jackpot game or the 6th jackpot game will be executed ( Circled "5" in FIG. 56).

Here, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the number of times that the jackpot game can be won continuously in the time-saving state and the jackpot game can be executed by winning the small prize is limited to two times. Then, when the jackpot winning in the second time-saving state and the jackpot game based on the small winning are executed (the big win is made in the second time-saving state), the limiter is activated, and forced with the end of the jackpot game. Normally, it shifts to the game state.

Thus, after the first jackpot game including four round games is executed, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth jackpot game including ten round games or the sixth jackpot game is integrated. And it is executed twice continuously, and the normal game state is entered. Therefore, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is executed in the normal game state, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that a total of 24 round games will be executed over three jackpot games. In the following, an integrated and continuous three-time jackpot game (one first jackpot game and two fifth jackpot games, or a sixth jackpot game) based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol A in the normal game state is treated as one jackpot game and called a "first set jackpot".

In addition, it shifts to the normal game state according to the end of the second 5th jackpot game and the 6th jackpot game, in other words, the last jackpot game (limiter jackpot game) related to the 1st set jackpot, but the pachinko game machine PY1. Since the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reservation number is "4", the special figure 2 variable display will be executed up to 4 times in the normal game state immediately after the limiter jackpot game.

In addition, since the pachinko game machine PY1 is configured so that it is easy to win the second start port 12 if the game ball continues to be shot with the right hand, the number of special figures 2 reserved immediately before the start of the limiter jackpot game is It is assumed that the upper limit value (4) is accumulated, and the special figure 2 variable display is executed 4 times in the normal game state immediately after the limiter jackpot game.

Also, in the following, when the normal game state is entered after the end of the limiter jackpot game, the remaining special figure 2 reserve at the time of transition to the normal game state is referred to as "remaining reserve". Then, if there is a remaining hold at the end of the limiter jackpot game, when shifting to the normal game state in response to the end of the limiter jackpot game, the production mode becomes a special mode, and the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining hold The special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to is performed in a special mode (circled "7" in FIG. 56). The effect content of the special mode will be described later.

If all the jackpot determinations based on the remaining hold in the normal game state are lost, the normal production mode will be activated in response to the end of the last special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state (encircled in FIG. 56 "16"). At this time, since there is no special figure 2 reservation and it is in the normal game state, the game ball is shot left-handed again to win the first start port 11, and the special figure 1 lottery based on the winning is won. A game aiming at will be performed.

Here, the probability of being determined as a "small hit" in the big hit determination related to the special figure 2 lottery in the normal game state is 80/319 (≈ 1/4), so if there are 4 remaining reservations, about 68 You will be able to win a small hit with a probability of %. Therefore, although it is in the normal game state, if there are 4 special figure 2 retention numbers at the time of transition to the normal game state, the possibility of winning a small hit rather than the possibility of not being able to win a small win when viewed as the entire remaining hold Since the is higher, the player can expect a big win.

When a small hit is determined based on the remaining hold in the normal game state, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. Depending on the winning symbol type, the prescribed number of time reductions relating to the time reduction state after the big winning game is different.

When the small hit pattern A is stopped and displayed in the normal game state and the big win is made (“10” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), the advantageous time saving state and the time saving production mode are set according to the end of the fifth big win game. Therefore, the subsequent game flow is the same as after the first jackpot game is executed based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol A in the normal game state. Therefore, after this, there is a high possibility that a total of two fifth jackpot games or sixth jackpot games will be executed (encircled “5”→“6”→“5” in FIG. 56). Then, when the second jackpot game is executed, the limiter is activated, and after the second fifth jackpot game or sixth jackpot game, the state is shifted to the normal game state (circled "7" in FIG. 56). ”). In addition, when the fifth jackpot game based on the stop display of the small winning pattern in the advantageous time saving state or the advantageous working time saving state according to the end of the sixth jackpot game, the production mode becomes the working hours saving production mode, and the advantageous working hours saving state Then, the production by the time saving production mode (in particular, the special figure fluctuation production) is executed.

In this way, when the stop display of the small winning pattern A is executed while the remaining hold is being consumed in the normal game state, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth display based on the stopping display of the small winning pattern A is performed. Three jackpot games including the jackpot game (one fifth jackpot game and two fifth jackpot games, or a sixth jackpot game) are integrally and continuously executed, and the three jackpot games are performed. A total of 30 round games are executed. In the following, three consecutive big winning games based on the stop display of the small winning symbol A in the normal game state are treated as one big winning game and referred to as "second set big winning".

On the other hand, when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed in the normal game state and the big win is made (“12” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), the game becomes a disadvantageous time saving state according to the end of the sixth big winning game. Here, the probability of being determined to be a "small hit" in the big hit determination related to the special figure 2 lottery in the disadvantageous time saving state is 80/319 (≈ 1/4), and the probability of being determined to be "losing" is Since it is 238/319, the possibility of being judged as "losing" is higher than the possibility of being judged as "small winning" in this single big winning judgment.

However, the special figure 2 variable display in the time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) with this time saving specified number of times is positioned as a period to accumulate the special figure 2 hold to the upper limit value, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed It is possible to accumulate the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit by continuing to shoot the game ball with the right stroke while it is. In addition, when it becomes disadvantageous time saving state according to the end of the sixth jackpot game, the effect mode becomes the charge mode ("13" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). The effect content of the charge mode will be described later.

And, when the unfavorable time saving state and one special figure 2 variable display in the charge mode stop displaying the losing pattern, the time saving state shifts to the normal game state according to the stop display, but in this case also, the limiter Just like immediately after the jackpot game, the special figure 2 variable display will be executed up to 4 times in the normal game state, and the special mode will be entered (“9” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). . Then, the flow of the game after this is the same as after the end of the limiter jackpot game. Therefore, when the stop display of the small hit symbol A is performed in the special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state, the second set big hit is performed from there. On the other hand, when the stop display of the small hit pattern B is performed in the special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state, after the sixth big win game is executed, it shifts to the disadvantageous time saving state and enters the charge mode, and the special figure 2 is held again. is stored up to the upper limit.

In addition, in the following, when the normal game state is entered after the time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) ends with one time-saving specified number of times, the special figure 2 hold that remains at the time of transition to the normal game state is also "remaining hold" called.

In addition, when the small winning pattern A is stopped and displayed in one special figure 2 variable display in the disadvantageous time saving state and the charge mode and the big hit (“14” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), the fifth big winning game is executed. It will be in an advantageous time saving state, and it will be in a time saving production mode ("11" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). As described above, when the advantageous gaming state is reached, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game will be executed (circled "5" in FIG. 56). Since the previous fifth big winning game is executed based on the small winning in the time saving state, when the big winning is won in the advantageous time saving state or the small winning is won and the big winning game is executed, the limiter is activated, After the jackpot game, the normal game state is entered and the special mode is entered (“7” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56).

Therefore, when the stop display of the small winning symbol A is performed in the disadvantageous time saving state and the charge mode, the fifth big winning game or the sixth big winning game is executed twice with a high probability (almost certainly), and the two times A total of 20 round games are executed over the jackpot game.

In addition, when the small winning pattern B is stopped and displayed in a single special figure 2 variable display in the disadvantageous time saving state and the charge mode and the big hit (“15” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), the 6th big winning game is executed. After that, it will be in an advantageous time saving state and will be in a time saving production mode ("17" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). Therefore, after this, similarly to the case where the stop display of the small winning pattern A is performed in the disadvantageous time saving state and the charge mode, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth big winning game or the sixth big winning will be played twice. A game is executed, and a total of 20 round games are executed over the two jackpot games.

In this way, in the disadvantageous time saving state and the charge mode, the stop display of the small hit pattern A or the stop display of the small hit pattern B is performed to enter the advantageous time saving state and the time saving production mode, with a high probability (almost Certainly) the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game is executed, and a total of 20 round games are executed over the two jackpot games. In the following, two integral and continuous jackpot games (two fifth jackpot games, or sixth jackpot games) based on the stop display of the small hit pattern A or the small hit pattern B in this disadvantageous time saving state It is treated as one jackpot game and is called a "third set jackpot". The flow of the game after the end of the limiter jackpot game related to the third set jackpot is the same as that after the end of the limiter jackpot game related to the first set jackpot.

In addition, when the small winning pattern A or the small winning pattern B is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display in the disadvantageous time saving state, and the third set big winning is executed, the fifth big winning game is played before the third set big winning. Or, since the 6th jackpot game is also executed, in fact, 3 times of the jackpot game (5th jackpot game or 6th jackpot game→3rd set jackpot) is integrally and continuously executed. become. However, in the disadvantageous time-saving state, the possibility of losing is higher than the small winning, and the third set big winning is not actively planned, so the integral and continuous sixth big winning game and the second The 3-set jackpot is not positioned as a series of jackpot games like the 1st-set jackpot or the 2nd-set jackpot.

Next, an assumed game flow after the stop display of the jackpot symbol B in the normal game state will be described. In this case, the second jackpot game including eight round games is executed (“2” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), and according to the end of the second jackpot game, the prescribed number of times of shortening time is set to one. It becomes the time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) and the same charge mode as described above (“8” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56).

In terms of the disadvantageous time saving state, as described above, it is the same as after the stop display of the small hit symbol B is executed in the special figure 2 variable display based on the remaining hold in the normal game state. However, in this case, the game is not performed in the time saving state before that, and it is assumed that there is no special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, the special figure 2 variable display in the time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) with one time saving specified number of times is also positioned as a period to accumulate the special figure 2 hold to the upper limit value, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed It is possible to accumulate the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit by continuing to shoot the game ball with the right stroke while it is.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the target of the time saving specified number of times that constitutes the end condition of the time saving state is the special figure 2 variable display, so there is a special figure 1 reservation at the time of starting the time saving state after the second jackpot game, and the special Even if the special figure 1 variable display based on FIG. 1 suspension is executed, the disadvantageous time saving state will not end.

In addition, when it becomes a disadvantageous time saving state according to the end of the second jackpot game, in terms of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 hold at that time, the special figure 2 variable display based on the remaining hold in the normal game state Small hit pattern Although different from the case of the unfavorable time saving state after the stop display of B is executed, the subsequent game flow is the same. Therefore, the possibility of winning a small hit in a disadvantageous time-saving state is lower than the possibility of losing, and the possibility of moving to a normal game state and a special mode is high, but in the normal game state and a special mode, the remaining hold The aim is to execute the stop display of the small winning design A or the small winning design B (small winning design) in the special figure 2 variable display based on.

Next, an assumed game flow after the stop display of the jackpot symbol C in the normal game state will be described. In this case, the third jackpot game including eight round games is executed (“3” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), and when the third jackpot game ends, the normal game state is entered, The normal presentation mode is entered (“18” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). In other words, although the third jackpot game was executed, the game state advantageous to the player ended there, returning to the same situation as before the third jackpot game.

In addition, after reaching the ceiling in the normal game state ("19" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), regarding the game state and the production mode, the jackpot pattern A is stopped and displayed in the normal game state, and the first jackpot game is started. It will be the same situation as after execution.

Then, as described above, after the first jackpot game is executed, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that a total of two fifth jackpot games or sixth jackpot games will be executed (circle in FIG. 56). "5" → "6" → "5" surrounded by ), since any jackpot game is executed when the small win is won, the limiter is activated when the second jackpot game is executed. When the first jackpot game ends, the normal game state is entered and the special mode is entered (encircled "7" in FIG. 56). Therefore, when an advantageous game state is reached by reaching the ceiling, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game is executed twice, and a total of 20 is played over the two jackpot games. 1 round game will be executed. In the following, two integral and continuous jackpot games (two fifth jackpot games or sixth jackpot games) based on reaching the ceiling are treated as one jackpot game and referred to as "fourth set jackpot". . The game flow after the fourth set big win is the same as after the first set big win.

In addition, in the advantageous time-saving state, time-saving production mode, disadvantageous time-saving state, charge mode, normal game state, and special mode, it may be determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination related to the special figure 2 lottery. In this case, the jackpot pattern type determination determines the jackpot pattern D, and the game after the stop display of the jackpot pattern D is performed in the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the jackpot determination (after jackpot 4). The flow is the same as when the small hit symbol A is stopped and displayed in the same game state and in the performance mode and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (big hit 5).

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a plurality of integral and continuous jackpot games are treated as one jackpot game, and as such jackpot games, the first set jackpot and the second set There are jackpots, third set jackpots, and fourth set jackpots, hereinafter collectively referred to as "set jackpots."

Next, a special figure variation pattern determination and a special figure variation pattern according to the first embodiment will be described. Special figure variation pattern determination is performed based on a special figure variation pattern determination table. The special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, special figure 2 variation pattern determination table) is a special figure variation pattern determination table used during the normal game state, and a special figure used when the advantageous time saving state It is divided into a figure variation pattern determination table and a special figure variation pattern determination table used at the time of disadvantageous time saving state.

In the following, the special figure variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state is referred to as the "normal special figure variation pattern determination table", and the special figure variation pattern determination table used in the advantageous time saving state is referred to as " Advantageous time-saving special figure variation pattern determination table”, and the special figure variation pattern determination table used in the disadvantageous time-saving state is referred to as “disadvantageous time-saving special figure variation pattern determination table”. Also, in the normal special figure variation pattern determination table, the one related to the special figure 1 is called the "normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table", and the one related to the special figure 2 is called the "normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table". called. Similarly, in the advantageous time-saving special figure variation pattern determination table, the one related to special figure 1 is called "advantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table", and the one related to special figure 2 is called "advantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern Judgment table", the one related to special figure 1 in the disadvantageous time saving special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is called "disadvantage time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table", and the one related to special figure 2 is called "disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table”.

In addition, in the normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, after the limiter jackpot game ends, or in the time saving state, the time saving state ends with the special figure 2 variable display of the specified number of times in the time saving state. There are things that are referred to before special figure 2 variable display is performed after 3 times, and other things. In the following, the former is referred to as "special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table", the latter is referred to as "general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table". Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game or after the end of the time-saving state, when there are four special figures 2 pending when the normal game state is shifted, the special figure 2 variable display executed last in the remaining pending is The general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table will be referred to.

Figure 57 (A) is a configuration example of the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, Figure 57 (B) is a configuration example of the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Also, FIG. 58(A) is an example of the configuration of the advantageous time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 58(B) is an example of the configuration of the advantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Furthermore, FIG. 59(A) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 59(B) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. In addition, the normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is configured in the same manner as the part of the non-time saving state of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of FIG. 11 in the basic embodiment. Therefore, illustration of the normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is omitted.

Next, before explaining the special figure variation patterns that can be determined by the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 can execute a special effect and a charge effect. A special effect is executed in a special mode, and a charge effect is executed in a charge mode.

In addition, both the special effect and the charge effect are executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result, in other words, the big hit determination result, and correspond to the special figure variable display according to the special figure variation pattern determination result (jackpot determination result) is executed as Then, the special effect and the charge effect constitute the special figure variation effect, and finally, the big hit determination result is notified by the effect content.

The special effects include a first special effect and a second special effect. The first special performance is executed until the third special figure 2 variable display is executed after entering the special mode, and the second special performance is executed at the fourth special figure 2 variable display after entering the special mode. be done. Therefore, if there is no special figure 2 pending at the time when the third special figure 2 variable display ends after the special mode is set, the second special effect is not executed.

In addition, although the details of the first special effect will be described later, in the first special effect, a background image dedicated to the first special effect composed of moving images (animation) is displayed on the entire display section 50a. The content of the moving image related to this background image is composed of a one-at-bat confrontation in baseball. The first special effect includes a long-time first special effect with a relatively longest effect time, a short-time first special effect with a relatively shortest effect time, and a long-time first special effect. There is a medium-time first special effect that is shorter than the short-time first special effect and longer than the short-time first special effect. As will be described later, the effect time related to the long first special effect, the effect time related to the middle time first special effect, and the effect time related to the short first special effect are associated with the special figure fluctuation time. .

The special figure 2 variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display during the period during which the first special effect can be executed in the special mode (the period from the transition to the normal game state to the execution of the third special figure 2 variable display) , It is determined with reference to the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 57 (C), in the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "big hit" and the "small hit" associated with There is a special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and a special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "loss".

Each special normal special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision table, 3 types of special figure 2 fluctuation patterns are formed selectably. In the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the jackpot, the special figure variation pattern (long first special jackpot variation) in which the first special effect is performed for a long time and the special figure in which the first special effect is performed for a medium time A variation pattern (middle first special jackpot variation) and a special figure variation pattern (short first special jackpot variation) in which the first special performance is executed for a short time can be selected. In the special normal special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table related to the small hit, the special figure fluctuation pattern (long first special small hit fluctuation) in which the first special production is executed for a long time and the medium time first special production is executed. A special figure variation pattern (medium first special small per variation) and a special figure variation pattern (short first special small per variation) in which the first special effect is executed for a short time can be selected. In the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the loss, the special figure variation pattern (long first special loss variation) in which the first special effect is performed for a long time, and the special figure in which the first special effect is performed in the middle time A variation pattern (medium first special losing variation) and a special figure variation pattern (short first special losing variation) in which the first special effect is executed for a short time can be selected. In this way, when the big win determination result is a big win, a small win, or a loss, the first special effect for a long time, the first special effect for a medium time, and the first special effect for a short time can be selected. , there is a possibility that the stop display of the big win symbols and the stop display of the small win symbols will be executed regardless of which kind of first special effect is executed. That is, the first special effect for a long time, the first special effect for a medium time, and the first special effect for a short time are effects suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win, and that there is a possibility of a small win. It is a suggestive performance.

In addition, in the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the jackpot, the long first special jackpot variation is selected with a probability of 85%, the medium first special jackpot variation is selected with a probability of 10%, and the probability of 5% , the short first special jackpot variation is selected. In addition, in the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the small hit, the long first special small hit fluctuation is selected with a probability of 50%, and the medium first special small hit fluctuation is selected with a probability of 35%. A short first special small hit variation is selected with a probability of %. Furthermore, in the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the loss, the long first special loss variation is selected with a probability of 10%, the medium first special loss variation is selected with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 60% , the short first special losing variation is selected. Therefore, the long-time first special performance is a performance that suggests a higher possibility of a big win than the medium-time first special performance and the short-time first special performance, and the possibility of a small win is high. It is a production that suggests The middle-time first special performance is a performance that suggests a higher possibility of a big win than the short-time first special performance, and is a performance that suggests a higher possibility of a small win.

In addition, in the second special effect, a background image exclusively for the second special effect composed of a moving image (animation) of predetermined content is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Note that the description of the performance contents of the second special performance is omitted. The special figure 2 variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display (the fourth special figure 2 variable display after shifting to the normal game state) during the period in which the second special effect can be executed in the special production mode is the general normal special figure 2 It is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 57 (B), in the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the "jackpot" and the "small hit" associated with There is a general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and a general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "losing".

Each general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured so that one type of special figure 2 variation pattern can be selected. In the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the jackpot, a special figure variation pattern (second special jackpot variation) in which the second special effect is executed can be selected. In the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the small hit, it is possible to select a special figure variation pattern (second special small per variation) in which the second special effect is executed. In the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to loss, a special figure variation pattern (second special loss variation) in which the second special effect is executed can be selected. In this way, when the big win determination result is a big win, a small win, or a loss, the second special effect can be selected. There is a possibility that the stop display of the small winning pattern will be executed. That is, the second special effect is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of winning a big win, and an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of winning a small win.

In addition, in the charge effect, a background image dedicated to the charge effect, which is composed of a moving image (animation) of predetermined content, is displayed on the display section 50a. Note that the description of the performance contents of the second special performance is omitted. The special figure 2 variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display (the first special figure 2 variable display after shifting to the disadvantageous time saving state) during the period in which the charge effect can be executed in the charge mode is the disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern judgment Determined by referring to the table. As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the "big hit" and the disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the "small hit" There is a disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and a disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "loss".

Each disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured so that one type of special figure 2 variation pattern can be selected. In the disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the jackpot, a special figure variation pattern (charging jackpot variation) in which the charge effect is executed can be selected. In the disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the small hit, the special figure variation pattern (charge small hit variation) in which the charge effect is executed can be selected. In the disadvantageous time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the loss, a special figure variation pattern (charge loss variation) in which the charge effect is executed can be selected. In this way, when the big win determination result is a big win, a small win, or a loss, the charge effect can be selected. Stop indication may be performed. That is, the charge effect is a effect suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win, and a effect that suggests a possibility of a small win.

In addition, as described above, the charge mode is a production mode corresponding to a time saving state with a specified number of times of working hours reduction. I aim. Therefore, in order to ensure sufficient time to accumulate up to four special figures 2 pending in the special figure 2 variable display, special figure fluctuation time related to charge jackpot fluctuation, special figure fluctuation time related to charge small hit fluctuation, And the special figure fluctuation time related to charge loss fluctuation is set to 40 seconds.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs greatly from the basic embodiment, and processing which is not performed in the basic embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the content of the processing described below is an example, and the content is not limited thereto.

First, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. A flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the special operation processing (S106) in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) described in the basic embodiment in the same manner as in the basic embodiment. . After the special operation process (S106), the game control microcomputer 101 performs specific area control process as step S107. After the specific area control process (S107), other processes (S107) in the basic embodiment are performed as step S108.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs processing for controlling the opening and closing of the specific region 16 in the small winning game, in other words, the operation of the distribution member 16k in the specific region control process (S107). As will be described later, the game control microcomputer 101 stores a small winning game specific area control table (see 53) corresponding to the type of the stopped small winning symbol in the game RAM 104 when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. field and set the special action status to "6". Then, the game control microcomputer 101, when the special operation status "6" is set, in the specific area control process (S107), with reference to the start of the small winning game, the set small winning game specific area control Based on the table, opening and closing of the specific area 16 (operation of the distribution member 16k) is controlled so that the time chart of the small winning game shown in FIG. 54 is realized.

Next, the sensor detection processing (S104) will be described. However, the game control microcomputer 101 performs steps up to step S220 in the sensor detection process (S104) described in the basic embodiment in the same manner as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, processing after step S220 will be described. FIG. 61 shows a flowchart of the sensor detection process according to the first embodiment, showing the part after step S220.

In step S221, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S225 when the game ball has not entered the first large winning hole 14 (NO in S221), and when the game ball has entered the first large winning hole 14 ( YES in S221), it is determined whether or not the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter provided in the game RAM 104 is equal to or greater than "11" (S222).

The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of first big winning openings 14 and second big winning openings 15 won in one round game of a big winning game or a small winning game. The big winning opening winning counter is cleared by the game control microcomputer 101 when each round game of the big winning game ends or when the small winning game ends. In the first embodiment, the number (AT winning prescribed number) that is allowed to win the first big winning opening 14 and the second big winning opening 15 in one round game and one small winning game It is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 and step S226, which will be described later, are performed.

If the counter value of the large winning opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S225 and determines that the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more. , is less than "11" (NO in S222), "1" is added to the counter value of the big winning hole winning counter (S223), and the first big winning hole for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player. A prize ball process is performed (S224), and the process proceeds to step S225. In the first big winning hole prize ball processing, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the prize ball counter for the first big winning hole 14 in the number of prize balls (first In the embodiment, "15") is added, and a command (first big prize winning command) indicating that the first big prize winning port 14 has been won is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

In step S225, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S229 when the game ball has not won the second big winning hole 15 (NO in S225), and when the game ball has won the second big winning hole 15 ( If YES at S225), it is determined whether or not the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter provided in the game RAM 104 is equal to or greater than "11" (S226).

When the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S226), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S229, and determines that the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more. , is less than "11" (NO in S226), the counter value of the big winning hole winning counter is incremented by "1" (S227), and the second big winning hole for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player. A prize ball process is performed (S228), and the process proceeds to step S229. In the second big winning hole prize ball processing, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the prize ball counter for the second big winning hole 15 in the number of prize balls (first In the embodiment, "15") is added, and a command indicating that the first big winning slot 14 has been won (second big winning slot winning command) is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.
to add.

In step S229, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 16a. If the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16 (NO in S229), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S232, and if the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (YES in S229), the game A specific area passing flag indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area 16 is turned ON in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 (S230), and a specific area passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 is sent to the game RAM 104. It is set in the output buffer (S231) and proceeds to step S232.

In step S232, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it is currently in the time saving state, that is, whether or not the time saving flag is ON. The game control microcomputer 101 finishes the sensor detection process when the game ball is not in the time saving state (NO in S232), and when it is in the time saving state (YES in S232), turns off the time saving flag and exits the game state. Reset, in other words, shift from the time-saving state to the normal game state (S233), set the game state designation command indicating the normal game state in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S234), and finish the sensor detection process. Thus, according to the game ball passing through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the normal game state from the time saving state. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the game state designation command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 to the effect control board 120 in the output process of step S101.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs the first large winning opening winning command, the second large winning opening winning command, and the specific area passing command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 to the effect control board in the output process of step S101. 120. The production control board 120 (production control microcomputer 121) receives the first large winning opening winning command, the second large winning opening winning command, and the specific area passing command, so that the winning to the first large winning opening 14, It recognizes that the game ball has won a prize in the second big prize hole 15 and the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 .

Next, special action processing according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 shows a flowchart of special action processing according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, in the special action process according to the first embodiment, the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83, the first big winning device 14D, the second big winning device 15D, and the specific area device 16D processing is divided into six statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" is assigned to each of these statuses.

When the "special action status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special action status" is "2", the special symbol variation. Processing (S1503) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3", a special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", game state setting processing (S1506) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "6", a small winning game Control processing (S1507) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

Small hitting game control processing (S1507) is processing which is done in the small hitting game. As will be described later, the game control microcomputer 101 stores a small winning game big winning opening control table (see FIG. 52) corresponding to the type of the stopped small winning symbol when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the game RAM 104. , and sets the special action status "6". Then, the game control microcomputer 101, when the special operation status "6" is set, in the small winning game control process (S1507), in FIG. Opening and closing of the second big winning opening 15 (operation of the second AT opening and closing member 15k) is controlled so that the time chart of the small winning game shown is realized.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific region 16, that is, whether or not the specific region passing flag is turned on when the small winning game ends in the small winning game control process. judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the big win game based on the passing through the specific area 16, in the same manner as when the big win symbols are stopped and displayed. , Steps S1767 to S1770 in the special symbol determination process to be described later are performed, and the specific area passing flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16, it changes the "special action status" to "1" in order to enable execution of the next special figure variable display.

Also, the game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting the game state to be controlled after the big win game when the big win game ends. As will be described later, the game control microcomputer 101, when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the game state at that time, the type of the stopped and displayed small winning symbols, and the big winning A game state setting table (see FIG. 55) corresponding to the type of symbol is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 . Then, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state based on the set game state setting table.

The game control microcomputer 101 turns on the time saving flag in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to shift to the time saving state when controlling in the time saving state after the jackpot game. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 also sets the continuation period in order to define the continuation period of the time saving state. In the first embodiment, the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display, so the game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving prescribed number of times to the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts to the normal game state by not turning on the time saving flag in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 when controlling in the normal game state after the jackpot game.

However, the game control microcomputer 101, when the jackpot game related to the game state setting process corresponds to the limiter jackpot game, even if the set game state setting table indicates that the time saving state is set, The time saving flag is not turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104, and the normal game state is entered. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game corresponds to the limiter jackpot game when a limiter flag, which will be described later, is ON. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101 finally turns off the limiter flag.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the time saving state to be set in the game state setting process (S1506) is an advantageous time saving state or a disadvantageous time saving state, in other words, whether the time saving prescribed number of times of the time saving state is 99 times. Whether it is once or not is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 . A game control microcomputer 101 sets a flag indicating an advantageous time-saving state when the time-saving state to be shifted from now is an advantageous time-saving state, and on the other hand, when the time-saving state to be shifted from now is an unfavorable time-saving state, an unfavorable time-saving state. A flag indicating the state is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 . This is because the special figure variation pattern determination table (conditions for determining the special figure variation pattern) referred to in the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state are different even in the same time saving state.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game in the game state setting process (S1506), but here, unlike the basic embodiment, the high probability state is not set. Therefore, a specific number of times (800 times in the first embodiment) related to the ceiling is set in a ceiling remaining number counter, which will be described later. By this process, the number of remaining executions of the special figure variable display until reaching the ceiling is counted.

Next, the special figure 2 determination processing according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the second big hit determination as step S1620 in the special figure 2 determination process. In the second jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the special symbol random number stored first among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and compares it to the second jackpot determination table. , to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss.

In step S1621, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a jackpot, it proceeds to step S1626, and if it determines that it is a jackpot, it selects the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the special figure 2 in step S1622, and in step S1623, the jackpot symbol type. make a judgment.

In the jackpot pattern type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored jackpot pattern type random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and compares it to the jackpot pattern type determination table. Then, it is determined which jackpot symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot pattern type determination, in step S1624, the pattern type flag indicating the jackpot pattern type, which is the determination result, is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1625, the determination result. A symbol specifying command indicating the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is finished, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is a small hit in step S1626. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a small hit, it proceeds to step S1631, and if it determines that it is a small hit, in step S1627, selects the small hit symbol type determination table according to the special figure 2, and in step S1628, A small hit pattern type determination is performed.

The game control microcomputer 101, in the small winning design type determination, reads out the first stored small winning design type random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and performs the small winning design type determination. The table is collated to determine which small winning symbol type. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the small winning symbol type determination, in step S1629, the symbol type flag indicating the small winning symbol type that is the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1630, the The symbol specifying command indicating the small hit symbol type as the determination result is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special figure 2 determination process is finished, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

In step S1631, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the missing symbol type (special figure 2's missing symbol) in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1632, the missing symbol type (special figure 2's Set the symbol designation command indicating the missing symbol) to the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, finish the special symbol 2 determination process, and return the process to the special symbol standby process.

Next, a special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment.

In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbols in step S1751, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703. It is determined whether or not it has passed (special action counter=0). The game control microcomputer 101 ends the special symbol determination process when the special symbol determination time has not passed, and when the special symbol determination time has passed, the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol in step S1752. Determine whether or not The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1767 if it is a jackpot pattern, and determines in step S1752 whether or not the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON) if it is not a jackpot pattern.

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state, it proceeds to step S1758, and if it is in the time saving state, in step S1754, it is determined whether or not the special figure stopped and displayed is the special figure 2. If the game control microcomputer 101 is not a special figure 2, it proceeds to step S1758, and if it is a time saving state, in step S1755, the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number) is subtracted by "1", and in step S1756 , determines whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is "0".

Game control microcomputer 101, if the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0", proceeds to step S1758, if the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is "0", In step S1757, the time saving flag is turned OFF to set the normal game state, and the process proceeds to step S1758.

In step S1758, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the currently displayed special symbol is a small winning symbol. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1771 if it is a small winning pattern, and determines whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining number counter is greater than "0" in step S1759 if it is not a small winning pattern. The value of the ceiling remaining number counter is provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, counting the remaining number of times of the special figure variable display that can be executed until the ceiling is reached (ceiling remaining number of times).

The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1765 if the ceiling remaining number of times is not greater than "0", and subtracts "1" from the value of the ceiling remaining number counter in step S1760 if the ceiling remaining number of times is greater than "0". Then, in step S1761, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining number counter is "0".

If the ceiling remaining number of times is not "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1765, and if the ceiling remaining number of times is "0", in step S1762, the time saving flag is turned ON, and based on the ceiling reaching By setting the specified number of times of shortening of working hours ``99'' relating to the end condition of the shortening of working hours to be shifted to the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours counter, the specified number of times of shortening of working hours is 99 times (advantive shortening of working hours).

Subsequently, in step S1763, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a command indicating that the ceiling has been reached (ceiling reaching designation command) in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and in step S1764, sets "2" to the limiter activation counter. set, and proceeds to step S1765. The limiter activation counter indicates the number of executions of the jackpot game that can be performed until the limiter is activated, and is provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 .

The game control microcomputer 101 confirms ON/OFF of the time saving flag in step S1765, sets the game state designation command indicating the current game state in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and in step S1766, special operation status is changed to "1", and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process in step S1767. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not a specific condition that the game is currently in the normal game state and the counter value of the limiter activation counter is "0" is established. . When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the specific condition is satisfied, it sets a specific condition satisfaction flag indicating that the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 . Establishment of the specific condition means that a jackpot game based on the stop display of the jackpot pattern or the stop display of the small hit pattern in the normal game state is started, and the time saving state is set according to the end of the jackpot game. This is for counting the number of executions of executable jackpot games until the limiter is activated.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the counter value of the limiter activation counter is "1" or more. Here, when the counter value of the limiter activation counter is "1" or more, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the counter value of the limiter activation counter so that the counter value of the limiter activation counter is "0". It is determined whether or not it has become When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the counter value of the limiter activation counter has become "0", the jackpot game to be started from now corresponds to the limiter jackpot game, so the limiter flag indicating that the limiter has been activated is set for the game. A predetermined area of the RAM 104 is turned ON.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on/off the limiter flag (whether or not the jackpot game to be started from now on is a limiter jackpot game), the type of the small hit pattern being stopped and displayed, or the type of the jackpot pattern. A jackpot game control table corresponding to the type is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 .

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state setting table corresponding to the current game state and the type of the small winning symbol displayed stopped or the type of the big winning symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 resets the value of the ceiling remaining number counter in step S1768, turns off the time saving flag in step S1769, and sets the value of the time saving remaining number counter to "0". is reset (shifted to the normal game state), and in step S1770, the special action status is changed to "4", and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 performs small winning game preparation processing in step S1771, changes the special operation status to "6" in step S1772, and ends the special symbol determination processing.

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 101, in the small winning game preparation process, the small winning game control table (small winning game large winning opening control table, and small winning game specific area control table) according to the type of the small winning symbol displayed stopped ) is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 . Then, the game control microcomputer 101, based on the small winning game large winning opening control table, predetermined opening time (from the start of the small winning game to the start of the first opening of the second large winning opening 15 time) in the special action timer.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on a small winning opening flag indicating that the small winning game is opening according to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and furthermore, , According to the type of the small winning symbol, an opening command indicating the type of the small winning symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. - 特許庁The opening command corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol indicates that the small winning game (opening of the small winning game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small winning symbol is started.

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 101, in the game state setting process (S1506), if the specific condition establishment flag is ON, when shifting to the time saving state, set the limiter activation counter to "2", the specific condition Turn off the establishment flag. In order to count the remaining number of executions of the big winning game until the limiter is activated because the transition to the time-saving state occurs with the end of the big winning game based on the stopped display of the small winning symbols in the normal game state and the stopped display of the big winning symbols. is.

Next, the effects that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute in the jackpot game will be described. The effect control microcomputer 121 executes a prize ball number effect related to the number of prize balls on the display unit 50a when the jackpot game is being executed. The number-of-prize-balls effect is configured by displaying a number-of-price-balls image G30 representing information about the number of prize balls. The prize ball number image G30 is composed of a prize ball number image G31 to represent the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, in other words, the number of prize balls to be obtained (planned prize ball number to be obtained), and a prize ball number image G31 that is actually obtained in the jackpot game. and a winning ball number image G32 that expresses the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) in numbers, with the planned winning ball number image G31 as the denominator and the won winning ball number image G32 as the numerator. It is configured.

The number of prize balls to be won image G31 represents the number of prize balls to be won in the jackpot game, and if the jackpot game constitutes a set jackpot, the number of prize balls to be won in the whole set jackpot. Similarly, the winning ball number image G32 represents the number of winning balls won through the set jackpot.

As described above, the first set jackpot, second set jackpot, third set jackpot, and fourth set jackpot have different numbers of jackpot games and round games. Specifically, the first set jackpot consists of one first jackpot game and two fifth jackpot games, or a sixth jackpot game, and includes 24 round games. The second set jackpot consists of three fifth jackpot games, or a sixth jackpot game, and includes thirty rounds of play. The third set jackpot consists of one fifth jackpot game and one fifth jackpot game, or a sixth jackpot game, and includes 20 round games. A fourth set jackpot consists of two fifth jackpot games or a sixth jackpot game and includes twenty rounds of play. Therefore, the number of game balls (the number of prize balls) that can be obtained based on the winning to the first big prize hole 14 differs depending on the type of the set jackpot.

The prescribed number of AT prizes for each round game is 10, and the number of prize balls based on the winning to the first big prize opening 14 at one time is 15, so that the total number of prizes in the first set jackpot is 3600. A total of 4,500 prize balls can be obtained in the second set jackpot, a total of 3,000 prize balls can be obtained in the third set jackpot, and a total of 3,000 prize balls can be obtained in the fourth set jackpot. 3000 prize balls are available.

Therefore, when the jackpot game related to the first set jackpot is being executed, "3600" is displayed as the expected prize ball number image G31, and when the jackpot game related to the second set jackpot is being executed, the expected win prize. When "4500" is displayed as the number-of-balls image G31 and the jackpot game related to the third-set jackpot is being executed, "3000" is displayed as the expected winning number-of-wins image G31, and "3000" is displayed as the jackpot game related to the fourth-set jackpot. is being executed, "3000" is displayed as the expected winning ball number image G31.

In addition, in the jackpot game related to each set jackpot, the won prize ball number image G32 represents the number of prize balls actually obtained through the set jackpot, so that the second and subsequent jackpot games related to each set jackpot are started. At this time, the number of prize balls actually obtained by the end of the previous jackpot game is inherited and displayed as the number of prize balls obtained image G32. Therefore, in each round game of each jackpot game, when the game balls can enter the first big prize opening 14 until reaching the prescribed number of AT prizes, the second and subsequent jackpot games related to each set jackpot are started. , the number of prize balls to be obtained by the end of the previous jackpot game is displayed as the number of prize balls obtained image G32.

For example, in the case of the first set jackpot, "600" is displayed as the won prize ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started, and when the third jackpot game is started, the won prize balls are displayed. "2100" is displayed as the number image G32. In the case of the second set jackpot, "1500" is displayed as the won prize ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started, and when the third jackpot game is started, the won prize ball number image is displayed. "3000" is displayed as G32. In the case of the 3rd set jackpot, "1500" is displayed as the winning ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started. In the case of the 4th set jackpot, "1500" is displayed as the winning ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number-of-balls effect is continuously executed from the start of the opening of the jackpot game to the end of the last round game. However, the execution period of the number-of-balls effect may be changed as appropriate. For example, the number-of-balls effect may be executed during the round game instead of during the opening. Also, the number of prize balls effect may be executed in the ending as well. Alternatively, the number-of-balls performance may be executed also in a time-saving state between jackpot games related to the set jackpot, other than during the jackpot game.

Further, as described above, in various set jackpots, the ending time for the limiter jackpot game is set to 10 seconds. Then, at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending effect is executed to suggest that the set jackpot ends. On the other hand, the non-limiter time related to the non-limiter jackpot game is set to 0 second. In other words, the non-limiter jackpot game does not have an ending after the round game ends, and if there is a special figure reservation, the last round game ends and the special figure variable display can be executed. Therefore, in the non-limiter jackpot game, the set jackpot ending effect and the effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game are not executed.

In the set jackpot ending effect, an image G42 (CI image G42) representing the CI (corporate identity) of the manufacturing company of the pachinko machine PY1, and an image G33 (total winning number Image G33) is displayed.

In addition, when moving to the time saving state and the time saving production mode according to the end of the non-limiter jackpot game related to the set jackpot, immediately after the end of the jackpot game, a production that suggests that it will be in the time saving production mode (time saving production mode start suggesting effect) is executed. The time-saving production mode start suggesting effect is configured by displaying an image G41 (time-saving production mode start-suggesting image G41) suggesting that the time-saving production mode will be entered.

In addition, in the last round game of the jackpot game executed first among the non-limiter jackpot games related to the set jackpot, the game is played in an advantageous time-saving state from now on, and the number of game balls possessed is less likely to decrease. An effect for calling attention to removing the prepaid card from the card unit CU (effect for calling attention to forgetting to remove the card) is performed. Forgetting to pull out the card warning effect is configured by displaying an image G40 (cardout forgetting to pull out warning image G40) calling attention to take out the prepaid card from the card unit CU. However, in a non-limiter jackpot game, the effect of calling attention to forgetting to remove a card is performed in a relatively inconspicuous manner, specifically, at a position closer to the end of the display section 50a and in a small size on the entire screen of the display section 50a. be done. This is because the round effect is being executed.

Also, in both the limiter jackpot game and the non-limiter jackpot game, an opening effect is executed at the opening to suggest that each jackpot game is started, and in the round game, it is suggested that the round game is being executed. A round effect is executed.

Even in jackpot games that do not constitute a set jackpot (second jackpot game, third jackpot game), an opening effect is executed to suggest that each jackpot game is started at the opening, and a round game is executed in the round game. In addition to executing a round effect suggesting that the jackpot game is ending, an ending effect suggesting that the jackpot game ends is executed.

In addition, in the ending of the second jackpot game, after the ending effect, an effect suggesting that the challenge mode is about to start (challenge mode start suggesting effect) is performed. The challenge mode start suggesting effect is configured by displaying an image (challenge mode start suggesting image) that suggests entering the challenge mode.

Here, specific examples of the effects related to the jackpot game such as the number of winning balls effect, the set jackpot ending effect, the effect of calling attention to forgetting to remove the card, the effect of suggesting the start of the time saving effect mode, etc. will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 74. FIG. Incidentally, in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 74 shown below, it is assumed that the game ball wins the AT winning regulation number and the first big winning hole 14 in each round game. Moreover, in each non-limiter jackpot game and the second jackpot game, it is assumed that the game ball passes through the specific region 16 and becomes an advantageous time saving state according to the end of the jackpot game.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the first jackpot game (non-limiter jackpot game) related to the first set jackpot, and FIG. game), FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example of various effects related to the last big win game (limiter big win game) related to the first set big win. Also, FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example of various effects related to the first jackpot game (non-limiter jackpot game) related to the second set jackpot, and FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the second set jackpot game (limiter jackpot game), and FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example of various effects related to the first jackpot game (non-limiter jackpot game) related to the third set jackpot, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a specific example of various effects related to the game). Further, FIG. 73 is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the second big winning game, and FIG. 74 is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the third big winning game.

FIG. 65(A) shows the state at the start of the first jackpot game (first jackpot game) relating to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 65(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize number image G30 is displayed. As described above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first set jackpot is 3600, so "3600" is displayed as the number of prize balls to be obtained image G31. Also, at this time, since the game ball has not won the first big prize hole 14 in the first set jackpot, "0" is displayed as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 65(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the first big winning game related to the first set big winning. As shown in FIG. 65(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the first set jackpot, the prize balls related to winning the first big winning hole 14 once will be displayed as the winning ball number image G32. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 65(C) shows the state immediately before the end of the final (fourth) round game of the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 65(C), a round image G3 representing that the fourth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. Also, in the first jackpot game (first jackpot game) in the first set jackpot, a maximum of 600 prize balls can be won. As G32, "600", which is the number of winning balls obtainable in the jackpot game, is displayed. Furthermore, the jackpot game is the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot, and in the last round game of the first jackpot game, the effect for calling attention to forgetting to remove the card is executed. An image G40 for reminding to forget to pull out is displayed.

FIG. 65(D) shows the state immediately after the first big winning game related to the first set big win is finished, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the first big winning game related to the first set big win is finished. . When the non-limiter jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends and becomes an advantageous time-saving state, the time-saving production mode start suggesting production is executed immediately after the jackpot game ends, and it is assumed as described above. As shown in FIG. 65(D), a time saving effect mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition, since it became time saving production|presentation mode, the background image G130 for time saving is displayed on the display part 50a.

FIG. 66A shows the state at the start of the second jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) relating to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 66(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. As described above, the winning number-of-balls image G32 related to the number-of-balls-winning-balls effect in the set jackpot represents the number of prize balls won through the set jackpot. Then, 600 prize balls are obtained in the first jackpot game of the first set jackpot (see FIG. 65 (C)), and at this time, the game ball is the first big winning hole in the second jackpot game 14, "600" is displayed as the winning ball number image G32.

FIG. 66(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the second big winning game related to the first set big winning. As shown in FIG. 66(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the second big winning game, the number of won winning balls image G32 is changed from "600" just before the first big winning hole. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to winning 14, is added.

FIG. 66(C) shows a state immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the second jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 66(C), a round image G3 representing that the tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. Also, in the second jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the first set jackpot, it is possible to win a maximum of 1500 prize balls. "2100" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (600) that can be obtained in the first jackpot game as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 66(D) shows the situation immediately after the second big win game related to the first set big win is finished, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the second big win game related to the first set big win is finished. ing. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 66(D), the time saving effect mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed on the display section 50a, in the same manner as immediately after the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends.

FIG. 67A shows the state at the start of the last (third) jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) relating to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 67(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. The winning number-of-balls image G32 related to the number-of-balls-of-balls effect in the set jackpot represents the number of prize balls won through the set jackpot. And, by the time the second jackpot game of the first set jackpot ends, 2100 prize balls have been obtained (see FIG. 66 (C)), and at this time, the game balls in the third jackpot game Since the player has not won the first prize-winning slot 14, "2100" is displayed as the number-of-winning-balls image G32.

FIG. 67(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the third big winning game related to the first set big winning. As shown in FIG. 67(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the third big winning game, the winning ball number image G32 is changed from "2100" just before the first big winning hole. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to winning 14, is added.

FIG. 67(C) shows the state immediately before the end of the final (10th) round game of the third big win game related to the first set big win. As shown in FIG. 67(C), a round image G3 representing that the tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. Also, in the third jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the first set jackpot, it is possible to win a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, "3600" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (2100) that can be obtained until the second jackpot game ends as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 67(D) shows the ending of the third (last) jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. The jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, and at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending effect suggesting that the set jackpot ends is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(D), in the ending, as a set jackpot ending effect, a CI image G42 and a total win number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls won in the first set jackpot are displayed. ing. The effect time of the set big win ending effect can be set as appropriate, but for example, the ending is executed from the start to the end.

FIG. 68(A) shows the state at the start of the first jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) relating to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 68(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize number image G30 is displayed. As described above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the second set big hit is 4500, so "4500" is displayed as the number of prize balls to be obtained image G31. Also, at this time, since the game ball has not won the first big prize hole 14 in the second set jackpot, "0" is displayed as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 68(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the first big winning game related to the second set big winning. As shown in FIG. 68(B), the display section 50a displays a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the second set jackpot, the prize balls related to winning the first big winning hole 14 once will be displayed as the winning ball number image G32. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 68(C) shows the state immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 68(C), a round image G3 representing that the tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the first jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the second set jackpot, a maximum of 1500 prize balls can be obtained. "1500", which is the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, is displayed as the number-of-winning-balls image G32. Furthermore, since the jackpot game is the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot, the display unit 50a displays the card removal forgetting warning image G40 in the same manner as the first set jackpot.

FIG. 68(D) shows the state immediately after the first big winning game related to the second set big win is finished, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the first big winning game related to the second set big win is finished. . When the non-limiter jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends and becomes an advantageous time saving state, the time saving production mode start suggesting production is executed immediately after the jackpot game ends, and it is assumed as described above. As shown in FIG. 68(D), a time saving background image G130 is displayed as a background image on the display unit 50a, and a time saving effect mode start suggesting image G41 is superimposed on the time saving background image G130.

FIG. 69(A) shows the state at the start of the second jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) relating to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 69(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. 1500 prize balls are obtained in the first jackpot game of the second set jackpot (see FIG. 68 (C)), and at this time, the game ball enters the first big prize opening 14 in the second jackpot game. Since no prize has been won, "1500" is displayed as the number-of-winning-balls image G32.

FIG. 69(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the second big winning game related to the second set big winning. As shown in FIG. 69(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the second jackpot game, the number of winning balls image G32 is changed from "1500" just before the first big winning hole. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to winning 14, is added.

FIG. 69(C) shows a state immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the second big win game related to the second set big win. As shown in FIG. 69(C), a round image G3 representing that the tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. Also, in the second jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the second set jackpot, it is possible to win a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, "3000" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (1500) obtainable in the first jackpot game as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 69(D) shows the situation immediately after the second big win game related to the second set big win is finished, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the second big win game related to the second set big win is finished. ing. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the time saving effect mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed on the display section 50a, in the same manner as immediately after the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends.

FIG. 70(A) shows the state at the start of the last (third) jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) relating to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 70(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. By the time the second jackpot game of the second set jackpot ends, 3000 prize balls have been obtained (see FIG. 69 (C)), and at this time, the game ball is the first in the third jackpot game. Since the player has not won the big winning slot 14, "3000" is displayed as the winning ball number image G32.

FIG. 70(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the third big winning game related to the second set big winning. As shown in FIG. 70(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the third big winning game, the winning ball number image G32 is changed from "3000" just before the first big winning hole. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to winning 14, is added.

FIG. 70(C) shows a state immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the third big win game related to the second set big win. As shown in FIG. 70(C), a round image G3 representing that the tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the third jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the second set jackpot, a maximum of 1,500 prize balls can be obtained, and since it is assumed as described above, "4500" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (3000) that can be obtained until the second jackpot game ends as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 70(D) shows the ending of the third (last) jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. The jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, and at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending effect suggesting that the set jackpot ends is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(D), in the ending, a CI image G42 and a total win number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls won in the second set jackpot are displayed as a set jackpot ending effect. ing. The effect time of the set big win ending effect can be set as appropriate, but for example, the ending is executed from the start to the end.

FIG. 71(A) shows the state at the start of the first jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) relating to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 71(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize number image G30 is displayed. As described above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the third set big hit is 3000, so "3000" is displayed as the number of prize balls to be obtained image G31. Also, at this time, since the game ball has not won the first big prize hole 14 in the third set jackpot, "0" is displayed as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 71(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the first big winning game related to the third set big winning. As shown in FIG. 71(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the third set jackpot, the prize balls related to winning the first big winning hole 14 once will be displayed as the winning ball number image G32. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 71(C) shows the state immediately before the end of the final (10th) round game of the first jackpot game related to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 71(C), a round image G3 representing that the tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the first jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the third set jackpot, a maximum of 1500 prize balls can be obtained, and since it is assumed as described above, it is possible to obtain "1500", which is the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, is displayed as the number-of-winning-balls image G32. Furthermore, since the jackpot game is the first jackpot game related to the third set jackpot, the display unit 50a displays an image G40 that calls attention to forgetting to pull out the card, as in the case of the first set jackpot and the second set jackpot. It is

FIG. 71(D) shows the state immediately after the first big winning game related to the third set big win is completed, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the first big winning game related to the third set big winning is completed. . When the non-limiter jackpot game related to the 3rd set jackpot ends and becomes an advantageous time saving state, the time saving production mode start suggesting production is executed immediately after the jackpot game ends, and it is assumed as described above. As shown in FIG. 71(D), a time saving background image G130 is displayed as a background image on the display unit 50a, and a time saving effect mode start suggestion image G41 is superimposed on the time saving background image G130.

FIG. 72(A) shows the state at the start of the last (second) jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) relating to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 72(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. By the time the first jackpot game of the third set jackpot ends, 1500 prize balls have been obtained (see FIG. 71 (C)), and at this time, the game ball is the first in the second jackpot game. Since the player has not won the big prize slot 14, "1500" is displayed as the winning ball number image G32.

FIG. 72(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the second big winning game related to the third set big winning. As shown in FIG. 72(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the second jackpot game, the number of winning balls image G32 is changed from "1500" just before the first big winning hole. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to winning 14, is added.

FIG. 72(C) shows a state immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the second big win game related to the third set big win. As shown in FIG. 72(C), a round image G3 representing that the tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the final jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the third set jackpot, a maximum of 1500 prize balls can be obtained, and since it is assumed as described above, it is possible to obtain As the number of awarded balls image G32, "3000" is displayed together with the number of awarded balls (1500) that can be obtained until the first jackpot game ends.

FIG. 72(D) shows the ending of the second (last) jackpot game related to the third set jackpot. The jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, and at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending effect suggesting that the set jackpot ends is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72(D), in the ending, a CI image G42 and a total win number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls won in the third set jackpot are displayed as a set jackpot ending effect. It is The effect time of the set big win ending effect can be set as appropriate, but for example, the ending is executed from the start to the end.

In addition, in FIGS. 67(D), 70(D), and 72(D), the CI image G42 and the total win number image G33 are simultaneously displayed as the set jackpot ending effect. Some or all of the set jackpot ending effects may be executed separately so that the time zones do not overlap. For example, the set jackpot ending effect may be divided into the first half and the second half so that the CI image G42 is displayed in the first half and the total win number image G33 is displayed in the second half. In addition, after the ending, the normal game state is basically entered and the special mode is entered. is displayed, the total acquisition number image G33 is displayed superimposed on the special mode background image, and an image suggesting that the special mode will be entered (special mode start suggesting image) is displayed. You can do it.

In addition, in the final round game of the jackpot game other than the first among the jackpot games related to the set jackpot, the effect for calling attention to forgetting to pull out the card is not executed. However, even in the final round game of the jackpot game other than the first, the effect for calling attention to forgetting to pull out the card may be executed.

FIG. 73(A) shows the state at the start of the second jackpot that does not constitute a set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 73(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize number image G30 is displayed. As described above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the second jackpot is 1200, so "1200" is displayed as the number of prize balls to be obtained image G31. Also, at this time, since the game ball has not won the first big prize hole 14 in the second jackpot game, "0" is displayed as the won prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 73(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the second jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 73(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the second jackpot game, the prize balls related to winning the first big winning hole 14 once will be displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 73(C) shows the situation just before the last (eighth) round game of the second jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 73(C), a round image G3 representing that the eighth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the second jackpot game, a maximum of 1200 prize balls can be obtained, and since it is assumed as described above, the obtained prize ball number image G32 can be obtained in the second jackpot game. "1200", which is the number of winning balls, is displayed.

FIG. 73(D) shows the ending of the second jackpot game. In the first embodiment, at the ending of the second jackpot game, a jackpot ending effect is executed to suggest that the second jackpot will end. Then, as shown in FIG. 73(D), as a jackpot ending effect, a CI image G42 and a total win number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls won in the second jackpot game are displayed.

In addition, in the second jackpot game, the effect for calling attention to forgetting to pull out the card is not executed. After the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving state is entered, but the specified number of times of time-saving related to the time-saving state is one time, and after that, the special mode is exited and the game ball is continuously shot left-handed in the normal production mode. This is because there is a possibility that the number of game balls possessed will decrease. In other words, after the second jackpot game, there is a possibility that the period during which the number of possessed game balls is extremely difficult to decrease will not continue for a long time. However, in the second jackpot game, an effect for calling attention to forgetting to pull out a card may be executed. In this case, since there is an ending in the second jackpot game, it is desirable to execute an effect for calling attention to forgetting to pull out the card in the ending. This is because, if the effect for calling attention to forgetting to remove the card is executed during the round game, the effect corresponding to the round game will be hindered, and the effect of the effect will be reduced. In this case, the image G40 for forgetting to pull out the card may be displayed in a larger position near the center of the display section 50a than in the case of the set jackpot, in other words, in a conspicuous manner.

Also, in FIG. 73(D), as the jackpot ending effect, the display of the CI image G42 and the display of the total number of acquisitions image G33 are displayed at the same time. can be For example, the CI image G42 may be displayed in the first half of the ending divided into two periods, and the total acquired number image G33 may be displayed in the second half. Also, after the ending, it basically becomes a disadvantageous time saving state and a charge mode. A background image dedicated to the charge mode (charge mode background image) is displayed, and a total acquisition number image G33 is displayed superimposed on the charge mode background image. mode start suggestion image) may be displayed in a display mode like the time saving production mode start suggestion image G41.

FIG. 74(A) shows the state at the start of the third jackpot that does not constitute a set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 74(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. In addition, the number-of-prizes-balls effect is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize number image G30 is displayed. As described above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the third jackpot is 1200, so "1200" is displayed as the number of prize balls to be obtained image G31. Further, at this time, since the game ball has not won the first big prize hole 14 in the third jackpot game, "0" is displayed as the number of won prize balls image G32.

FIG. 74(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the third jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 74(B), a round image G3 representing that the first round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first big winning hole 14 in the third jackpot game, the winning ball number image G32 for winning the first big winning hole 14 once The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 74(C) shows the situation just before the final (eighth) round game of the third jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 73(C), a round image G3 representing that the eighth round game is being executed is displayed on the display section 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the third jackpot game, a maximum of 1200 prize balls can be obtained, and since it is assumed as described above, the obtained prize ball number image G32 can be obtained in the third jackpot game. "1200", which is the number of winning balls, is displayed.

FIG. 74(D) shows the ending of the third jackpot game. In the first embodiment, at the ending of the third jackpot game, a jackpot ending effect is executed to suggest that the third jackpot will end. Then, as shown in FIG. 74(D), as a jackpot ending effect, a CI image G42 and a total win number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls won in the third jackpot game are displayed.

In addition, in the third jackpot game, the effect for calling attention to forgetting to pull out the card is not executed. This is because the normal game state is entered after the end of the jackpot game, and if the game balls are continuously shot with the left hand, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls will decrease.

In addition, in FIG. 74(D), the display of the CI image G42 and the display of the total acquisition number image G33 are performed simultaneously as the jackpot ending effect, but they are performed separately so that the time slots do not overlap. can be For example, the jackpot ending effect may be divided into the first half and the second half, in which the CI image G42 is displayed in the first half and the total winning number image G33 is displayed in the second half. Further, after the ending, the normal game state and the normal effect mode are entered. Therefore, for example, in the second half of the jackpot ending effect, the normal effect mode background image G111 is displayed as the overall background image on the display unit 50a. A total acquisition number image G33 is displayed superimposed on the background image G111 for the normal production mode, and an image suggesting that the normal production mode will be entered (an image suggesting the start of the normal production mode) is displayed to start the time-saving production mode. It may be displayed in a display mode like the suggestive image G41.

Next, a description will be given of effects that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute in the small winning game. The production control microcomputer 121 promotes right-hand hitting promotion production during a small-hit game to promote shooting the game ball by right-hand hitting in the small winning game, and V to promote the game ball to pass through the specific area 16.例文帳に追加A winning promotion effect is executed. This is a condition for executing a big winning game after the small winning game that the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, and the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 15 is the specific area 16 , and the second big winning hole 15 is provided in the right game area 6B. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes a V prize notification effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the specific region 16 when the game ball passes through the specific region 16 in the small winning game. This is to reassure the player.

In addition, the right hitting promotion effect during the small winning, the V winning promotion effect and the V winning notification effect are executed in order. Specifically, in the small winning game, when the opening is completed, in other words, when the second big winning opening 15 is first opened, the right hitting promotion effect during the small winning is started first. The right hitting promotion performance during the small hit is executed over 1.5 seconds. When the right hitting promotion performance during the small winning is completed, it is switched to the V winning promotion performance. When the game ball passes through the specific area 16 while the V prize promotion performance is being executed, the V prize promotion performance is switched to the V prize notification performance. After that, the V winning notification effect is executed until the small winning game ends.

The right hitting promotion effect during the small hit, the V winning promotion effect, and the V winning notification effect are executed in the display section 50a. The right-hand hitting promotion effect during a small hit is composed of display of a first small-hit hitting right promotion image G50 and a second small hitting right-hand hitting promotion image G51 that promotes shooting a game ball by hitting right. The first small hit middle right hitting promotion image G50 represents the behavior of the game ball being hit to the right, and the game area image G50a representing a part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 including the game area 6 and the trajectory of the game ball. and a game ball trajectory image G50b. The second small-hit middle-right hitting promotion image G51 is composed of a block arrow representing the general direction of the specific area 16, and the block arrow includes the characters "right hitting".

The V winning promotion effect is configured by displaying an image G53 (V winning promotion image G53) for promoting the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. FIG. The V winning promotion image G53 consists of an image G53a (V winning promotion phrase image G53a) that expresses in words ("Aim for V" in the first embodiment) that the game ball is to pass through the specific area 16, and the small V winning promotion phrase image G53a. An image G53b (V winning remaining time G53b) representing the remaining time (V winning remaining time) until the opening of the second big winning hole 15 in the winning game is completed. The V winning remaining time G53b consists of a linear progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the V winning remaining time.

The V winning notification effect is configured by displaying an image G54 (V winning notification image G54) for notifying that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16. FIG. The V prize notification image G54 is composed of the letter "V".

In addition, the production mode of the right-hand hitting promotion effect in the small win game, the V winning promotion effect, and the V winning notification effect is that when the big win is won in the small win game, it becomes an advantageous time saving state after the end of the big win game. , different from otherwise. In other cases, when a big win is won in the small winning game, the situation becomes a disadvantageous short-time state after the end of the big winning game, and even if the big winning is won in the small winning game, the big winning game becomes a limiter big winning game, so the big win. After the end of the game, the normal game state may be entered. Then, in the latter case, the effect control microcomputer 121 grandly (extensively) executes the right-hand hitting promotion effect during the small win, the V winning promotion effect, and the V winning notification effect. Right hitting promotion performance during winning, V prize promotion performance, and V prize notification performance are modestly (compactly) executed. In the former case, when the advantageous time saving state is reached, the special figure 2 variable display is executed 99 times in the time saving state, so the player does not rush to win the V prize in the time saving state. While it is not necessary to perform performance, V prize promotion performance, and V prize notification performance very flashy, in the latter case, when it becomes a disadvantageous time saving state, the special figure 2 variable display is executed only 5 times including the remaining hold. In addition, when it comes to the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining hold can only be executed 4 times, and the V prize is impatient, so the right hitting promotion production during the small hit, the V prize promotion production , and the V winning notification effect must be flashy. In the following, the right-handed promotion effect during the small hit, the V prize promotion effect, and the V prize notification effect are referred to as the "small hit medium specific effect", and in the former case, the small hit medium specific effect is referred to as the "second It is called 1 small per middle specific production", and the small per middle specific production in the latter case is called "second small per middle specific production".

Next, a specific example of the specific performance during the small hit will be described. First, the specific effect during the second small hit will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of the specific effect during the second small hit. FIG. 75(A) is a diagram showing the state of the early stage of the right-handed promotion effect during the small hit, FIG. 75(B) is a diagram showing the state after the early stage of the right-handed promotion performance during the small prize, FIG. 75(C) 75(D) is a diagram showing the state at the start of the V prize promotion effect, FIG. 75(E) is a diagram showing the state of the V prize promotion effect during the V prize promotion effect, and FIG. is.

As shown in FIG. 75 , the small winning middle right hitting promotion effect, the V winning promotion effect, and the V winning notification effect in the second small winning medium specific effect are executed on the entire screen of the display section 50a. When the hitting to the right promotion effect during the small winning is started, the first hitting to the right promoting image G50 during the first small winning is displayed in the background image displayed on the entire screen of the display unit 50a. Here, a game area image G50a representing the upper end of the game area 6 is displayed, and the trajectory of the game ball moving toward the right game area 6B in the game area 6 represented by the game area image G50a is displayed. A game ball trajectory image G50b is displayed. Then, when the trajectory of the game ball related to the game ball trajectory image G50b approaches the right game area 6B, as shown in FIG. An image G51 is displayed. Furthermore, when the second small hit middle right hitting promotion image G51 is displayed, the game area 6 represented in the game area image G50a is expanded in accordance with the movement of the game ball trajectory related to the game ball trajectory image G50b. It moves from the upper end to the right game area 6B.

Next, when the trajectory of the game ball related to the game ball trajectory image G50b reaches the second big winning opening 15 of the game area 6 shown in the game area image G50a, as shown in FIG. 75(C), The right-hand hitting promotion performance during the small hit is switched to the V winning promotion performance. Specifically, the right hitting promotion image G51 during the second small winning disappears, and a large V winning promotion image G53 is displayed on the left half of the display section 50a. The V winning promotion effect is continuously performed until the game ball passes through the specific area 16. During that time, as shown in FIG. V winable remaining time G53b changes according to the progress of .

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, as shown in FIG. 75(E), the V prize promotion effect is switched to the V prize notification effect. Specifically, the V winning promotion image G53 disappears, and a large V winning notification image G54 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a.

Next, the specific effect during the first small hit will be described. FIG. 76 shows a specific example of the specific effect during the first small hit. FIG. 76(A) is a diagram showing the beginning of the right-handed promotion production during the small hit, FIG. 76(B) is a diagram showing the appearance after the beginning of the right-handed promotion production during the small prize, FIG. 76(C) 76(D) is a diagram showing the state at the start of the V prize promotion effect, FIG. 76(E) is a diagram showing the state of the V prize promotion effect during the V prize promotion effect, and FIG. is.

As shown in FIG. 76, the right hitting promotion effect during the small hit in the first small win medium specific effect, the V winning promotion effect, and the V winning notification effect are reduced screens 50g formed on a part of the screen of the display unit 50a. is executed in The reduced screen 50g is formed when the opening ends, and disappears when the small winning game ends. Further, the reduced screen 50g is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same aspect ratio as the entire screen of the display section 50a, and is formed in a size of approximately 1/5 to 1/8 of the entire screen of the display section 50a. It is displayed at the right end of the portion 50a and approximately in the center in the vertical direction.

The shape, size, and display position of the reduced screen 50g may be changed as appropriate. However, it is desirable that the size of the reduced screen 50g is smaller than 1/4 of the entire screen of the display section 50a. This is for the purpose of executing a modest, small-hit, medium-specific effect to some extent.

Then, when the middle-small-hit right-handed promotion performance is started, most of the second middle-hit specific performance performed on the entire screen of the display unit 50a is executed on the reduced screen 50g. Specifically, for the first small hitting middle right hitting promotion image G50, the V winning promotion image G53, and the V winning notification image G54 related to the small hitting middle right hitting promotion effect, in the case of the second small hitting middle specific effect The contents displayed on the entire screen of the display section 50a are displayed as they are on the reduced screen 50g. However, the second small winning medium hitting right promotion image G51 is executed on the entire screen of the display section 50a, as in the case of the second small winning medium specific effect.

In addition, in FIG. 76(B), the second small hit middle right-handed promotion image G51 is displayed at a predetermined distance from the reduced screen 50g so as not to overlap the reduced screen 50g, but it overlaps the reduced screen 50g. may be displayed as follows.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 76, when the reduced screen 50g is formed in the first small winning medium specific effect, the entire screen of the display unit 50a displays the first small winning medium as a background of the reduced screen 50g. A background image with content corresponding to the specific effect is displayed. The content of the background image here can be appropriately set, but for example, content related to the subject matter of the pachinko machine PY1 that is unrelated to the content related to the game, such as hitting to the right or passing the game ball through the specific area 16 It is good as

Next, the effects that the pachinko game machine PY1 can execute in the special mode will be described. The production control microcomputer 121 shifts to a special mode as the production mode when the first special figure 2 variable display relating to the remaining reservation is started, and the last special figure 2 variable display relating to the remaining reservation is terminated. End special mode.

There are a first special effect and a second special effect in the special figure variation effect in the special mode. The first special effect is executed in the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 1 to the reservation order 3 related to the remaining reservation, and the second special production is the special figure of the reservation order 4 related to the remaining reservation It is executed with special figure 2 variable display corresponding to 2 hold. Therefore, when shifting to the special mode, if the remaining pending is less than 4 pieces, the second special effect is not executed in the special mode.

In each of the first special effects, the display section 50a displays an animation of a production content in which the main character, the pitcher, and the enemy character, the batter, face each other in a one-at-bat battle in a baseball game. Then, in the case of a big win, the enemy character finally hits a home run, and in the case of a loss, the enemy character is finally defeated and out.

Also, each first special effect is associated with each other. Below, the relevance between the effects of the first special effect will be described. If the big hit determination result related to the special figure 2 variable display is a loss, the batter is defeated at the end of the first special effect, resulting in one out. Then, the special figure 2 variable display is executed next, and when the first special performance is executed in the special figure 2 variable display, the 1 out is taken over and the next first special performance is executed, The next first special effect is performed with the out count incremented by one.

Furthermore, when the final first special effect is a loss, the game is always finished with 3 outs regardless of the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode. Therefore, the out count associated with each first special effect differs according to the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode.

When the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 4, the out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 1 related to the remaining reservations becomes "0", and the remaining reservations The out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 2 is "1", and the out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 3 related to the remaining reservation is becomes "2". That is, when the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 4, the first special effect starts with "0" out, and thereafter, every time the batter is beaten, in other words, every time it is lost The count is incremented one by one, and at the end of the first special effect corresponding to the reservation order 3, "3" is out. Then, the second special effect is executed with the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the reservation order 4. - 特許庁

If the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 3, the out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 1 related to the remaining reservations becomes "0", and the remaining reservations The out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 2 is "1", and the out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 3 related to the remaining reservation is becomes "2". That is, when the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 3, the first special effect starts with "0" out, and thereafter, every time the batter is beaten, in other words, every time it is lost The count is incremented one by one, and at the end of the first special effect corresponding to the reservation order 3, "3" is out. Then, when the final first special performance is completed, the special mode is shifted to the normal performance mode without performing the second special performance.

If the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 2, the out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 1 related to the remaining reservations is "1", and the remaining reservations The out count in the first special effect corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 2 is "2". That is, if the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 2, the first special effect starts with "1" out, and thereafter, every time the batter is beaten, in other words, every time it is lost The count is incremented one by one, and at the end of the first special effect corresponding to the reservation order 2, it becomes "3" out. Then, when the final first special performance is completed, the special mode is shifted to the normal performance mode without performing the second special performance.

When the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 1, the out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 1 relating to the remaining reservations is "2". That is, when the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 1, the first special effect starts with "2" outs, and when the batter is beaten, in other words, when it is lost, the out count is increased by one. to get a “3” out. Then, when the first special effect ends, the special mode is shifted to the normal effect mode without performing the second special effect.

The types of enemy characters that appear (displayed) in the first special effect include enemy character X, enemy character Y, and enemy character Z. The types of these enemy characters are associated with the out count associated with the first special effect. Specifically, in the first special effect that starts with the out count of "0", the enemy character X appears (confronts with the main character), and in the first special effect that starts with the out count of "1", the enemy character Y appears (confronts with the main character), and in the first special effect that starts with the out count "2", the enemy character Z appears (confronts with the main character).

In the first special effect, the main character as the pitcher and the enemy character as the batter have a one-at-bat confrontation. The showdown goes on. In addition, the detailed content of the first special effect will be described later.

The second special effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern. The second special performance is executed in the last special figure 2 variable display when the number of remaining pending is maximum four at the time of transition to the special mode. Therefore, the fact that the second special effect is executed means that the first special effect of three times ends in failure, resulting in three outs, and if the special figure 2 variable display does not hit the jackpot, the game is played in the normal effect mode, in other words. This is an unfavorable critical situation for the player that the game will be performed in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the second special effect, after voicing an objection to the "ball" decision in the final first special effect, a video decision is made to determine whether the decision is overturned or not. An animation of the content of the branching effect is displayed as a background image on the entire screen of the display section 50a. Then, the determination is overturned in the case of a small hit or a big hit, and the determination is maintained in the case of a loss.

Next, the count image G60 displayed on the display section 50a in the first special effect will be described. The count image G60 displays the ball count and strike count in the one-at-bat confrontation, as well as the out count in the one-at-bat confrontation. A specific example of the count image G60 is shown in FIG. Count image G60 represents a typical display that displays ball counts, strike counts, and out counts in a BSO manner. In each one-at-bat confrontation, depending on the progress of the game, the circles lined up on the right side of the letter "B" representing the ball and the circles lined up on the right side of the letter "S" representing the strike will move from left to right. Light up sequentially. In addition, as the out count increases, the circles arranged to the right of the character "O" representing out are sequentially lit from left to right. Note that when the first special effect is being executed, the count image G60 is basically displayed in the left corner of the display section 50a so as to be superimposed on the first special effect background image G150 dedicated to the first special effect described later. be done.

Here, FIG. 78 shows the overall effect flow of the special mode. FIG. 78 schematically shows the overall effect flow of the special mode using the display contents displayed on the display section 50a for each number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode. FIG. 78(A) shows the production flow when the number of remaining reservations is 4, FIG. 78(B) shows the production flow when the number of remaining reservations is 3, and FIG. 78(C) shows the production flow when the number of remaining reservations is 3. is two, and FIG. 78(D) shows the effect flow when the number of remaining pending is one. In addition, FIG. 78 shows the display contents displayed on the display section 50a, but the display contents are the display contents at the start of each first special effect. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 78, it is assumed that all the special figures 2 variable display will be lost.

The number of remaining holds when shifting to the special mode, the relationship between the order of holdings related to the remaining holds and the out count, and the relationship between the out count and the types of enemy characters are as described above, but FIG. As shown in FIG. 78(D), the portion representing the outcount of the count image G60 (the character “O”) changes in accordance with the change in the outcount in the content of the effect (on the story) based on the situation related to the special mode. right) is also changing. Note that the portion of the count image G60 representing the out count (on the right side of the character "O") changes when one out is confirmed at the end of the first special effect.

Also, at the start of each first special effect, an enemy character related to the first special effect is displayed in the center of the display section 50a. After that, the confrontation between the enemy character and the main character is developed in the first special effect background image G150.

Furthermore, at the start of each first special effect, a confrontation remaining number image G61 representing the remaining number of enemy characters that can be confronted in the special mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the display section 50a. Specifically, when the (first) first special effect related to the reservation order 1 in the special mode is started with the out count “0” (the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 4, or 3 If you continue to fail (if you continue to be out) after that, you will face up to three enemy characters including the first special effect, so "3 more" is displayed. When one out occurs in the first one-at-a-bat showdown performance, the first special performance related to the second reserved order is started, since a maximum of two enemy characters including the first special performance related to the second reserved order will be played. Sometimes it says "2 more people". Furthermore, if one out occurs in the first special effect related to the reservation order 2, since the first special effect related to the next reservation order 3 is included, at most one enemy character is confronted. At the start of the 1 special effect, "one more player" is displayed.

Similarly, when the (first) first special effect related to the reservation order 1 in the special mode is started with the out count "1" (when the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 2), After that, if you continue to lose (if you continue to be out), you will face up to two enemy characters including the first special effect, so "2 more characters" is displayed. When one out occurs in the first first special performance, the first special performance related to the second reservation order is started because the player faces up to one enemy character including the first special performance related to the next reservation order 2.例文帳に追加Sometimes it says "one more".

Also, when the (first) first special effect related to the reservation order 1 in the special mode is started with the out count "2" (when the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 1), the Since the 1st special effect is the last, "one more player" is displayed.

In this way, the remaining face-to-face number image G61 represents the remaining number of enemy characters that can be faced in the special mode, and this numerical portion indicates the remaining number of executions of the first special effect that can be executed in the special mode. Since it corresponds, it substantially represents the remaining execution count of the first special effect that can be executed in the special mode.

Next, the content of the first special effect will be described. As described above, special figure 2 variation pattern that can be determined in the period (period from the transition to the normal game state to the execution of the third special figure 2 variable display) during which the first special effect can be executed in the special mode As a long 1st special jackpot change, medium 1st special jackpot change, and short 1st special jackpot change, long 1st special small hit change, medium 1st special small hit change, and short 1st special jackpot change related to the jackpot There are 1 special small hit variation, and long 1st special losing variation related to losing, medium 1st special losing variation, and short 1st special losing variation (see FIG. 57).

In the special figure 2 variable display of the long first special jackpot fluctuation, the long first special small hit fluctuation, and the long first special losing fluctuation, the first special effect is executed for a long time in common. In the special figure 2 variable display of the middle first special big hit fluctuation, the middle first special small hit fluctuation, and the middle first special losing fluctuation, the middle time first special performance is executed in common. In the special figure 2 variable display of the short first special big winning variation, the short first special small winning variation, and the short first special losing variation, the first special effect for a short time is executed in common.

The long-time first special effect, the middle-time first special effect, and the short-time first special effect are all one kind of the first special effect, and are distinguished by the difference in the effect time. The long-time first special effect is the first special effect with the longest effect time among the three, the short-time first special effect is the first special effect with the shortest effect time among the three, and the medium-time first special effect. The special performance is a first special performance whose performance time is longer than the first special performance for a short time and shorter than the first special performance for a long time.

In the following, the long 1st special jackpot fluctuation, the long 1st special small hit fluctuation, and the long 1st special losing fluctuation are referred to as "long-time 1st special performance fluctuation", and the medium 1st special jackpot fluctuation, medium The 1st special small hit fluctuation and the medium 1st special loss fluctuation are referred to as "medium time 1st special performance fluctuation", the short 1st special big hit fluctuation, the short 1st special small hit fluctuation, and the short 1st special loss The variation may also be referred to as "short-time first special effect variation".

In addition, the long 1st special jackpot fluctuation, the medium 1st special jackpot fluctuation, and the short 1st special jackpot fluctuation are referred to as "first special performance jackpot fluctuation", and the long 1st special small hit fluctuation, medium 1st special small Per variation and short first special small per variation are referred to as "first special effect small per variation", long first special losing variation, medium first special losing variation, and short first special losing variation It may also be referred to as "first special performance loss variation".

Furthermore, the long-time first special effect variation, the medium-time first special effect change, and the short-time first special effect change, as well as the first special effect big hit change, the first special effect small hit change, and the first special The performance loss variation may be collectively referred to as “first special performance variation”.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation time related to the long 1st special jackpot fluctuation and the long 1st special small hit fluctuation is longer than the special figure fluctuation time related to the long 1st special loss fluctuation, the medium 1st special jackpot fluctuation, and The special figure fluctuation time related to the medium 1st special small per fluctuation is longer than the special figure fluctuation time related to the medium 1st special loss fluctuation, the short 1st special big per fluctuation, and the short 1st special small per fluctuation The figure fluctuation time is longer than the special figure fluctuation time related to the short first special loss fluctuation. This is because, in the case of a big win and a small win, an effect (specific notification effect) is executed to notify the big win or a small win, which is not executed in the case of a loss.

In the first special effect, the main character who is the pitcher and the enemy character who is the batter have a one-at-a-bat confrontation regardless of the type, in other words, regardless of the difference in performance time. In a one-at-bat confrontation, the main character throws the ball multiple times, and the ball count and strike count increase as the game progresses. is beaten and one out is taken. A home run result suggests a small hit or a big hit, and a result of taking one out suggests a loss. That is, although the pitcher is the main character, in the first special effect, the advantageous development from the line of sight of the batter, who is the enemy character, is the content of the effect that is advantageous to the player.

Regardless of the type of the first special effect, in the one-at-bat confrontation, the main character throws the ball a plurality of times. The number of counts (ball count, strike count) tends to increase as the number increases. Therefore, the number of counts (ball count, strike count) is most likely to increase in the first special effect for a long time, and the number of counts (ball count, strike count) is most difficult to increase in the first special effect for a short time. This is the first special effect for a short time. In addition, since the degree of expectation for a big win and the degree of expectation for a small win are high in the order of the first special effect for a long time > the first special effect for a medium time > the first special effect for a short time, the count (ball count, strike count) is high. It can also be said that as the number increases, the degree of expectation for the big win and the degree of expectation for the small win also increase.

The effect content of the first special effect is determined by the effect control microcomputer 121 based on the first special effect variation. A plurality of production contents (production patterns) are associated with each first special production variation. In addition, the 1st special production based on the long 1st special jackpot fluctuation, the 1st special production based on the long 1st special small hit fluctuation, the 1st special production based on the middle 1st special jackpot fluctuation, and the medium 1st special small hit fluctuation In each of the first special performance based on the first special performance, the first special performance based on the short first special jackpot variation, and the first special performance based on the first short special small winning variation, the same performance contents are performed. However, all or part of them may have completely different presentation contents, or may have partially the same and partially different presentation contents.

In addition, the 1st special production based on the long 1st special small hit fluctuation (long 1st special big hit fluctuation) and the 1st special production based on the long 1st special loss fluctuation, the middle 1st special small hit fluctuation (the medium 1st special jackpot 1st special performance based on variation) and 1st special loss based on 1st special loss variation, and 1st special performance and short 1st special loss based on short 1st special small hit variation (short 1st special jackpot variation) Each of the first special effects based on the variation has a corresponding relationship with respect to the contents of the effect. More specifically, the same production content is performed until the final result (home run or beaten). However, all or part of them may have completely different presentation contents, or may have partially the same and partially different presentation contents.

When the production control microcomputer 121 receives a special figure fluctuation start command indicating the first special production fluctuation, for example, in step S4306, based on the special figure fluctuation start command, the production contents of the first special production (first In order to determine the special effect pattern), the first special effect pattern determination is performed.

The first special effect pattern determination is executed with reference to a first special effect pattern determination table. A configuration example of the first special effect pattern determination table is shown in FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the first special effect pattern determination table is associated with special figure variation patterns. Specifically, as the first special effect pattern determination table, the first special effect pattern determination table for the long first special big hit fluctuation and the long first special small hit change, the first special effect pattern decision table for the long first special losing fluctuation Production pattern judgment table, Medium 1st special big hit fluctuation, Medium 1st special 1st special production pattern judgment table for small hit fluctuation, Medium 1st special Loss fluctuation 1st special production pattern judgment table, Short 1st special There is a first special effect pattern determination table for big win fluctuation and short first special small win change, and a first special effect pattern judgment table for short first special losing fluctuation. Each of the first special effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 79 to 80 is configured appropriately so that the selection rate for each first special effect pattern is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG.

Here, the winning process of the one-at-a-bat confrontation performed in the first special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG. The rightmost item (effect content) in each first special effect pattern determination table is the effect flow of the first special effect of the first special effect pattern. The production flow includes a game process of a one-at-a-bat confrontation as a specific production story.

``Ball'', ``Swift swing'', ``Foul'', ``Home run'', ``Strikeout'', and ``Left fly'', and "reach". Since these are elements that constitute the effect flow of the first special effect, they are hereinafter referred to as "first special effect flow constituent elements". Since the elements other than "reach" in the first special effect flow component are elements that constitute the game process related to the one-at-a-bat confrontation between the main character and the enemy character, they are hereinafter referred to as "game process components".

Note that the ``missing swing'' as a ``game process component'' is a strike due to a whiffing when the strike count is ``0'' or ``1'', and the turn at bat continues after the whistling. Also, a "strikeout" is generally accompanied by a strike due to a whiff or a strike due to an oversight. Therefore, it is distinguished from ``whiff'' as a ``game process component''.

"Ball", "whiff", "foul", "home run", "strikeout", and "left fly" included in the "game process component" are all the results of the enemy character's response to the main character's pitch. . In other words, before the “ball”, “missing swing”, “foul”, “home run”, “strikeout”, and “left fly”, the main character always throws a pitch, and the specific elements of each game process component are performed. Such production contents include pitching by the main character.

Among the components of the game process, the "home run", "strikeout", and "left fly" are performed at the end of the first special effect, in other words, the first performance that ends the turn at bat and suggests the jackpot determination result. It is positioned as the final result of a special production (a one-at-a-bat confrontation). "Home run" is the final result of the first special effect (one-at-a-bat confrontation) that suggests a big hit or a small hit, and "strikeout" and "left fly" are the first special effects (1 It is the final result of the batting showdown). On the other hand, "ball", "whiff", and "foul" are positioned as results that are not performed at the end of the first special effect, in other words, are intermediate results during which turn at bat continues thereafter. Therefore, "ball", "whiff", and "foul" do not directly suggest a big hit judgment result. Below, "home runs", "strikeouts", and "left flies" are referred to as "game process final results", and "balls", "missing swings", and "fouls" are referred to as "game process intermediate results". called.

A "ball" is derived as an intermediate result, and the ball count is incremented by one. Also, when the strike count is "0" or "1", if "foul" is derived as an intermediate result, the strike count is increased by one. In other words, the winning process of the confrontation progresses by deriving intermediate results. Furthermore, "strikeout" is derived as the final result of the first special effect, but since "strikeout" is accompanied by a strike due to a missed swing, when "strikeout" is derived, the strike count is increased by one, and the out count is increased. increases by one.

Also, as the first special effect flow component, reach is included, but after reach, "foul", "home run", or "strikeout" is derived. That is, "foul", "home run", and "strikeout" can be derived along with the formation of reach. A "foul" can be derived in the case of a small win, a big win, or in the case of a loss. On the other hand, "home run" is derived in the case of a small win or a big win, and "strikeout" is derived in the case of a loss.

As described above, in the first special effect, an advantageous development from the line of sight of the batter, who is the enemy character, is the content of the effect that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the mid-game result of "ball" is positioned as an effect content advantageous to the player, and the mid-game result of "missing swing" is positioned as an effect content disadvantageous to the player. As shown in the selection ratios shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the first special effect, the ball count and the strike count increase. Expectations for big hits and small hits are high.

Here, a specific effect flow of the first special effect will be described. For example, in the first special effect pattern "TEP002", the pitcher throws the ball first, and the batter sees it off until it becomes a ball (ball). Subsequently, the pitcher throws the ball and the batter whiffs, resulting in a strike (whiff). Next, after the reach is established (reach), the pitcher throws the ball and the batter swings it, but it becomes a foul ball (foul). Finally, the pitcher throws the ball and the batter swings it to make a home run (home run). The home run ends the first special effect, and a small winning game or a big winning game is performed.

In addition, in the first special effect pattern "TEP102", after the reach is established (reach), the first special effect pattern "TEP002" is performed until the pitcher throws the ball and the batter swings it, but it becomes a foul ball (foul). is the same as Finally, when the pitcher throws the ball, the batter misses and strikes out (strikeout). With this strikeout, the first special effect ends, and the next special figure variable display becomes executable. Therefore, when the out count becomes "1" or "2" as a result of striking out in the first special effect, the next first special effect is executed.

Next, specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special performance will be described. In the middle of the first special effect, the specific display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed on the display section 50a immediately after the "ball" or the "whiff" is derived as the intermediate result. As the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been displayed in a state of being difficult to see until then but have not been displayed are displayed all at once in a state where they are variably displayed around the center in the vertical direction of the display section 50a. Immediately after that, the temporary stop display is performed in quick succession, and then the state is returned to the state where it is difficult to be visually recognized while the display is changed again. It should be noted that the difficult-to-recognize state related to the specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be replaced with a non-displayed state.

In the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the display content (stop display mode) of the temporary stop display when the temporary stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed depends on the type of intermediate result ("ball", "miss ”). The stop display mode associated with the "ball" is the so-called "straight eye", and the stop display mode associated with the "missing swing" is the so-called "separate eye". In the first embodiment, the order is "(1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 6), (7, 8, 9) = left production pattern EZ1, middle production pattern EZ2, right production pattern EZ3". 3 patterns are set. On the other hand, as loose stitches, there are three patterns of "(1, 5, 4), (2, 7, 6), (3, 9, 8) = left production pattern EZ1, middle production pattern EZ2, right production pattern EZ3". is set.

Also, in the first embodiment, the order pattern and the random pattern do not suggest the degree of expectation for the big win and the degree of expectation for the small win. When the first special effect pattern is determined, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the sequence pattern and the loose pattern for each "ball" and "whiff" included in the first special effect pattern. are also determined, and the selectivity of the pattern of each order and the pattern of each loose stitch at the time of determination are set to be the same. The order pattern and the random pattern may indicate the degree of expectation for the big win and the degree of expectation for the small win.

In addition, in the specific display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, the production contents when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 appear all at once in a state where the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are variably displayed can be set as appropriate. With the three EZ3 arranged side by side, each of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 appears on the spot while rotating about its axis of rotation in the vertical direction. The rotation in this case constitutes the variable display.

Further, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed, immediately after that, an intermediate result corresponding image G62 corresponding to the intermediate result is displayed superimposed on the temporary stop display while the temporary stop display is maintained. be. If the intermediate result is "ball", an intermediate result corresponding image G62 with the characters "ball" is displayed, and if the intermediate result is "miss", the intermediate result corresponding image G62 with the characters "strike" is displayed. be done.

The interim result corresponding image G62 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds). When the interim result corresponding image G62 disappears, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed, return to a state in which they are difficult to see while being variably displayed again, and the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 ends. , proceed to the next first special effect flow component.

When the interim result corresponding image G62 disappears, it moves while being deformed so as to be sucked toward the part corresponding to the count increase due to the "ball" or "missing" in the count image G60. Then, when the interim result corresponding image G62 reaches the corresponding part in the count image G60, it disappears while being sucked into the corresponding part in the flow, and the corresponding part in the count image G60 lights up.

In this way, after the pitcher throws the ball in the animation and the batter responds with a "ball" or a "missed swing" as an intermediate result, specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and during that By overlapping execution of the intermediate result corresponding image G62, the intermediate result is suggested, the count image G60 changes accordingly, and a series of flows until the specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is completed. is a unit (block) related to intermediate results (“ball” and “whiff”), and in the first special effect, this intermediate result (“ball” and “whiff”) One unit (block) on the performance related to is repeated multiple times.

Further, after the end of the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, pitching by the pitcher relating to the next intermediate result (“ball” and “missing swing”) is started or reach is established. When the ready-to-win state is established, the display portion 50a slowly fades downward from the upper end of the display portion 50a in a state in which the easily visible left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are aligned. The left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 at this time are composed of the same kind of effect symbol G10. Then, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 descend as they are and stop at the approximate center in the vertical direction, and reach is established.

Further, the interim result corresponding image G62 also includes an interim result corresponding image G62 corresponding to the interim result "foul" and consisting of the characters "foul". However, when the intermediate result "foul" is derived, unlike the case of "ball" or "missing swing", the specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is not performed, and the pitcher throws the ball in the animation. , an interim result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed when "foul" is derived as an interim result in response to the batter.

The interim result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds). Then, when the interim result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed, if the immediately preceding strike count is "0" or "1", the strike count is increased by one. In such a case, when the interim result corresponding image G62 disappears, it moves while being deformed so as to be sucked toward the portion corresponding to the out count increased by the "foul" in the count image G60. Then, when the interim result corresponding image G62 reaches the corresponding part in the count image G60, it disappears while being sucked into the corresponding part in the flow, and the corresponding part in the count image G60 lights up.

In the first embodiment, in the first special effect, if the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3, which are composed of two same type of effect patterns G10, slowly fade in, the reach always increases. Although this holds true, it is also possible to make it so that it does not stop near the center in the vertical direction, but instead descends vigorously from there and then fades out from the lower end of the display section 50a.

Next, a specific example of the first special effect performed on the display section 50a will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. FIG. Here, the first special effect pattern "TEP002" will be described as an example. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example of the first special effect flow component "ball" in the first special effect pattern "TEP002", and FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example of the first special effect flow constituent element "Miss", and FIG. 83 shows the third and fourth first special effect flow constituent elements "Reach" FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example of "Foul", and FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example of the fifth first special effect flow component "Bohmerin" in the first special effect pattern "TEP002". It is assumed that the first special effect of the first special effect pattern "TEP002" is started from the out count "0".

As shown in FIG. 81(A), in the first special effect flow component related to "ball", first, in the animation that constitutes the first special effect background image G150, the pitcher (main character) hits the batter with the ball. A scene of throwing is displayed (throwing scene). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a scene in which the batter sees the ball off is displayed (ball see-off scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the order associated with the "ball" (in FIG. 81(C), "1, 2, 3 ”), the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(D), in a state in which the temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is being performed, the interim results associated with the "ball" are superimposed on the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. A corresponding image G62 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. circle) lights up. Immediately after that, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 disappear while being re-variably displayed (not shown), and the next first special effect flow constituent element (here, the second “miss”) is entered.

In the first special effect flow component related to "whiff", first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a scene in which the pitcher (main character) throws the ball to the batter is displayed (throwing scene). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a scene in which the batter whiffs is displayed (whiff scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the loose stitches associated with the "missed swing" (in FIG. 82(C), "1, 5, 4 ”), the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82(D), in a state in which the temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is being performed, the interim results associated with the "missing swing" are superimposed on the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. A corresponding image G62 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. circle) lights up. Immediately after that, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 disappear while being re-variably displayed (not shown), and the next first special effect flow constituent element (here, the third "reach") is entered.

It should be noted that in the pitching scenes related to the "ball" and the "missing pitch", the pitcher (the main character) does not take much time and simply throws his standard (basic) ball (non-decisive pitch) in a normal pitching motion. ).

In the first special effect flow constituent elements related to "reach", first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a left effect symbol EZ1 and a right effect symbol EZ3 are composed of two effect symbols G10 of the same type. are aligned, it slowly fades in from the upper end of the display section 50a and descends as it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 stop near the center in the vertical direction, reach is established, and the next first special effect flow component (here, , fourth "foul"). When reach is established, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are reduced while maintaining the reach and move to the upper right corner of the display section 50a.

In the first effect flow component related to "foul", first, as shown in FIG. ). In the pitching scene related to "foul", the pitcher (main character) throws his own good ball (decisive pitch) with an exaggerated action that takes longer than in the case of "ball" or "missing".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a scene is displayed in which the batter swings the bat and becomes a foul ball (foul scene). When the foul scene is displayed in the animation, an interim result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(E). After a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed, the interim result correspondence image G62 disappears, and the strike count "2" portion (two "S" circle on the right) lights up. After that, the process immediately shifts to the next first special effect flow component (here, the fifth "home run").

In the first effect flow component related to "home run" as well, first, as shown in FIG. A scene of throwing is displayed (decisive ball throwing scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a scene is displayed in which the batter swings the bat, followed by a close-up of the close ball and bat (ball-bat close-up scene). This close-up scene of the ball and bat constitutes a turning point between a small win, a big win, and a loss (win-lose branch point).

Then, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a scene is displayed in which the batter shakes off the bat and becomes a home run (home run scene). Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the board movable body 55k is actuated to be lowered to substantially the center of the display section 50a in the vertical direction in a front view and held, and in the display section 50a, An effect image G99 that effectively shows the operation of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire screen of the display section 50a. The operation of the board movable body 55k (including holding at the lowered position) and the display of the effect image G99 are performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(E), the board movable body 55k returns to its original state, and the effect image G99 disappears on the display section 50a, and a scene in which the batter is happy is displayed, and FIG. 84(F). 3, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 composed of the three performance symbols G10 of the same type appear in the vertical center of the display section 50a and are completely stopped and displayed. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The end of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed according to the end of the special figure 2 variable display. Then, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is finished, the performance corresponding to the small winning game or the big winning game is started.

It should be noted that the operation of the board movable body 55k (including holding at the lowered position), the display of the effect image G99, and the display of the scene that the batter is pleased with are not performed in the case of a loss, and are not executed in the event of a loss. Construct an effect (specific notification effect) to be performed.

Next, a specific example of the first special effect will be described using the first special effect pattern "TEP102" as an example. The first special effect of the first special effect pattern "TEP102" progresses halfway in the same way as the first special effect of the first special effect pattern "TEP002" (the first special effect flow component shifts). Specifically, the first special effect of the first special effect pattern "TEP102" progresses to the middle with the same effect content as the first special effect of the first special effect pattern "TEP002" up to the breakpoint. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of the fifth first special effect flow component "strikeout" in the first special effect pattern "TEP102". It is assumed that the first special effect of the first special effect pattern "TEP102" is started from the out count "0".

In the first special effect flow component related to "strikeout" as well, as shown in FIG. ) is displayed (decisive ball throwing scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a scene is displayed in which the batter swings the bat, followed by a close-up of the close ball and bat (close-up scene of hole and bat). This close-up scene of the ball and bat constitutes a turning point between a small win, a big win, and a loss (win-lose branch point). Then, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a scene in which the bat hits the air and strikes out is displayed (strikeout scene). Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a scene in which the pitcher is happy is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 85(F), the portion (character The circle to the right of the "O") lights up, and the part related to the ball count and the part related to the strike count are reset. The end of the enlarged display of this count image G60 is performed according to the end of the special figure 2 variable display. When the out count is "1", the first special effect can be executed two more times. Along with returning, the next first special effect is started (not shown).

Thus, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, the second big winning hole 15 that can be opened and closed and into which the game ball can enter when opened, and the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 pass through. It has a specific area 16 controlled to a specific state that can be entered and a non-specific state that cannot be entered, can perform variable display of the special figure 1, and a jackpot pattern is derived by the variable display of the special figure 1. Then, a jackpot game (special figure 1 jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the variable display of the special figure 2 can be executed. When the area 16 is controlled to a specific state and the game ball enters the specific area 16, a jackpot game (special figure 2 jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and a special figure 1 jackpot game and a special figure 2 jackpot game are executed. Depending on the end, it is possible to set the variable display of special figure 2 to a time-saving state that is easier to execute than the normal game state, and a predetermined number of times ( In the first embodiment, twice), when the small winning pattern is derived in the time saving state when the time saving state is reached continuously and the special figure 2 big winning game is executed, the special figure 2 big winning game ends Depending on what you do, you may be in a normal game state. In other words, the pachinko machine PY1 is composed of a so-called “one type and two type machine”, and has a game feature in which the continuous occurrence of the time-saving state is limited to a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the so-called ``1 type and 2 types mixing machine'', a plurality of jackpot games while the continuous occurrence of the time saving state continues are treated as one jackpot game (set jackpot) to give the player a sense of security and satisfaction. As well as being able to give a feeling, a new bodily sensation can be obtained, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Furthermore, when the small winning pattern is derived in the normal game state and the special figure 2 big winning game is executed, in response to the end of the special figure 2 big winning game, it is possible to continue for the first period (time saving prescribed number of times is 1 times) time-saving state (disadvantageous gaming state) and time-saving state that can be continued for a second period longer than the first period (time-saving prescribed number of times is 99 times). When the time-saving state can be continued for the second period, the time-saving state occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times again, and the possibility that a set jackpot consisting of a plurality of jackpot games can be executed increases, so that the game is played more and more. Increased interest. Furthermore, since it is possible to reserve the right to execute the variable display of the special figure 2 up to a predetermined number (4 in the first embodiment), it is possible to continuously generate a set jackpot once. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of security and a sense of satisfaction, and at the same time, the interest in the game is improved.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, in response to the end of the jackpot game, it may be in an advantageous game state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state, and then the jackpot determination is made in the normal game state. When the jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (two or three times in the first embodiment) without being executed, the first jackpot game is executed among the jackpot games of the predetermined number of times. In response to this, the display unit 50a executes a specific display (prizing number effect) representing the number of game media (game balls) obtainable in the predetermined number of jackpot games. Therefore, the predetermined number of jackpot games from once entering an advantageous game state (time-saving state) until falling to a normal game state can be shown as one jackpot game (set jackpot), which satisfies the player. The feeling can be given and the amusement of the game is improved.

Furthermore, in each jackpot game of the predetermined number of jackpot games, a specific display (prize number presentation) is executed on the display unit 50a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a stronger feeling of one big winning game (set big winning), and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the normal game state is set in response to the end of the last big win game when the big win game is continuously executed for a predetermined number of times without executing the big win determination in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the whole game sharp.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, the game area 6 includes an electric chew opening and closing member 12k capable of switching between a first mode (closed mode) and a second mode (open mode), and a normal mode (closed mode). ) and a specific mode (open mode) in which the game ball enters more easily than the normal mode, and a specific area through which the game ball entering the second big winning port 15 can pass. 16 is provided, a small winning game is executed in which the second big winning opening 15 becomes a specific mode, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player can be made. Yes, when a game ball that has passed through a predetermined position (specific position X) in the game area 6 can enter the second big winning hole 15, and the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the second mode. However, when the game ball passes through the specific region 16 in the time saving state, the electric tube opening / closing member 12k is less likely to be in the second mode than in the time saving state. In the game state, the small winning game has a small winning opening negative period and a small winning opening active period after the small winning opening negative period, and the small winning opening negative period and the small winning opening negative period are second. The big winning hole 15 becomes the specific mode at least once, and the second big winning hole 15 becomes the specific mode during the positive small winning opening period rather than the time when the second big winning hole 15 becomes the specific mode during the negative small winning opening period. It takes longer. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during the small winning open negative period, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k becomes difficult to be in the second mode in the subsequent small winning open positive period. As a result, the game ball passes through the predetermined position and enters the second big winning hole 15 in the small win open active period in which the second big winning hole 15 takes a relatively long time to be in the specific mode, and the game ball is further specified. Since the loss of the opportunity to pass through the area 16 can be suppressed, the disadvantage suffered by the player can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the small winning open active period, when the second big winning opening 15 first becomes a specific mode and then becomes a normal mode, the normal mode is held for a longer time than the time of the first specific mode. Even if the game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 passes through the specific area 16 when the second big winning hole 15 is in the specific mode for the first time, the electric tuning opening/closing member 12k is held in the second mode. Since it is possible to suppress the period in which the game is held from approaching the small winning opening active period, the disadvantage suffered by the player can be further reduced. In addition, in the small winning opening negative period, the second big winning opening 15 is in the specific mode at least twice, and the first specific mode and the second specific mode are more than the time of both the first specific mode and the second specific mode. The duration of the regular aspect after the aspect and the duration of the regular aspect after the second specific aspect are longer. Therefore, even if the game ball could not enter the second large winning opening 15 when the second large winning opening 15 was in the specific mode for the first time, the second large winning opening 15 was opened for the second time. When the game ball is in the specific mode, the game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 15, and thereafter, the period in which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the second mode is approaching the small win open positive period. can be suppressed, it is possible to further reduce the disadvantages suffered by the player. Furthermore, the time for the normal mode after the first specific mode is longer than the time for the normal mode after the second specific mode. Therefore, when the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 15 when the second big winning hole 15 is in the specific mode for the first time, it is possible to prevent the subsequent delay. Furthermore, in the small winning open positive period, the unit action that the second big prize opening 15 in the normal mode changes to the specific mode and returns to the normal mode is executed a plurality of times, and the unit action is more related to the unit action than the specific mode time related to the unit action. The time of the normal mode is longer, and the time of the normal mode after the first specific mode in the first period and the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode are longer than the time of the normal mode related to the unit motion. is longer. Therefore, when the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 15 when the second big winning hole 15 is in the specific mode for the first time or the second time, it is possible to prevent the subsequent delay. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the waste of not being able to enter the second big winning hole 15 when the game ball is continuously shot during the active small winning opening period.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, when a specific condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during execution of the small winning game is established, a time-saving state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is created. It is possible to execute a specific effect during a small hit related to the establishment of a specific condition during the execution of a small winning game, and when the specific condition is established, the prescribed number of times of shortening time is 1 (relatively short duration) Disadvantage In the case of a time saving state, a small hit medium specific effect is executed in the first mode (the entire screen of the display unit 50a), and when the specific condition is satisfied, the time saving prescribed number of times is 99 times (relatively long duration) advantage. When it becomes a time-saving state, a specific performance during a small hit is performed in the 2nd mode (50g of reduced screens formed in the display part 50a) which is harder to recognize than a 1st mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player psychological leeway against the advantageous time-saving state in which it is difficult to miss the opportunity for the specific condition to be met, and the disadvantage that the opportunity for the specific condition to be met is likely to be missed if the player is careless. It is possible to prevent missing an opportunity to satisfy a specific condition by impressing that the working hours will be shortened.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the specific condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during the execution of the small winning game is established, the player is more likely to enter the normal game state than the normal game state. It may be in a time-saving state that is advantageous to the game, and it is possible to execute a specific effect during the small win related to the establishment of the specific condition during the execution of the small win game, and when the specific condition is established, the normal game state is entered. A second mode (formed on the display unit 50a) that is harder to recognize than the first mode when a small hit medium specific effect is executed in the mode (the entire screen of the display unit 50a) and a specific condition is established, and a time saving state is entered A small win medium specific effect is executed on the reduced screen 50g). Therefore, it is possible to give the player psychological leeway against the situation in which it is difficult to miss the opportunity to meet the specific conditions, and it is easy to miss the opportunity to meet the specific conditions if the player is careless. It is possible to prevent missing an opportunity to satisfy a specific condition by impressing that the player is in a game state.

Further, an operation means capable of operating to shoot the game ball is further provided, and the specific condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during execution of the small winning game can be established by the shot game ball. Yes, it is not established when the game ball is not shot in the small winning game. Therefore, in particular, when a specific condition is established and the game is in a disadvantageous time-saving state, and when the game is in a normal game state, the performance effect of the small winning medium specific performance is improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, when the special mode is started, in other words, when the special figure 2 variable display is started in the normal game state, at a predetermined reference time, the special figure 2 hold is a predetermined number (first embodiment , 4 pieces) or more can be executed when the second special effect is reserved, and the second special effect when the special figure 2 reservation is not reserved for a predetermined number (4 in the first embodiment) or more do not run Therefore, it is possible to improve the value of the second special effect and enhance the effect of the second special effect.

Furthermore, the special figure 2 reservation can be reserved up to a predetermined number (four in the first embodiment). That is, the second special effect cannot be executed unless the special figure 2 reservation is accumulated to the upper limit value before the predetermined reference time. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the value of the second special effect and enhance the effect of the second special effect. Also, when the special figure 2 reserve at the time of a predetermined reference is accumulated a predetermined number (in the first embodiment, 4 pieces), the special executed last in the variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure 2 reservation A second special effect is executed while the variable display of FIG. 2 is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the second special effect. Furthermore, when a predetermined number of special figures 2 reserve at the time of a predetermined reference (4 in the first embodiment) is accumulated, special figures 2 other than the last in the variable display of special figures 2 based on the special figure 2 reservations It is possible to execute a first special effect different from the second special effect when the variable display of is being executed. Therefore, even when the variable display of the special figure 2 other than the last is being executed, the player can be entertained and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine PY1, in the first special effect, a plurality of unit effects (game process component: the batter's response to the pitcher's one pitch) are repeatedly executed, and finally, the final As a result, the first result (strikeout) or the second result (home run), which suggests that there is a higher possibility of a small hit or a big hit than the first result, is derived, and in each of the unit productions, finally, A third result (strike) or a fourth result (ball) that differs from the first result and the second result is derived. Therefore, the third result and the fourth result are derived a plurality of times in one first special effect, and the player can be made to think that chances are coming many times. A game interest can be improved.

Furthermore, the first special effect is executed when the special figure 2 variable display is executed when a small win or a big win advantageous to the player is derived and when a loss disadvantageous to the player is derived. Therefore, the effect of the first special effect can be improved. In addition, in the unit production, the production pattern is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode (separate eyes) in response to deriving the third result, and the production pattern is displayed in the second predetermined mode (derivation) in response to deriving the fourth result. Since there is a case where stop display is performed in order), the unit performance can be sharpened, the third result and the fourth result can be made easy to understand, and the performance effect of the unit performance can be improved. Furthermore, the first special effect consists of a predetermined game (a one-at-bat baseball match), the first result constitutes a loss (strikeout) in the predetermined game, and the second result is a victory in the predetermined game. (home run), the unit performance constitutes the process leading to victory and defeat related to a predetermined game, the third result shows the contents of the defeat (missing) related to the predetermined game, and the fourth result. indicates the winning content (ball) related to a predetermined match. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the first special effect and the effect of the unit effect.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In 1st Embodiment, although the limiter which concerns on a time saving state was set to 2 times, this number of times may be changed suitably without being restricted to 2 times. In addition, the limiter in the pachinko game machine PY1 is one type of two times, but the number of times related to the limiter may be two or more types. In this case, depending on the type of special figure, the number of times of the limiter may be set.

In addition, in the first embodiment, two types of time saving specified number of times, 1 time and 99 times, are provided, but the specific number and type of time saving specified number of times are not limited to the first embodiment as appropriate You can change it.

Furthermore, the probability of winning a small hit in the big hit determination related to the special figure 2 lottery is not limited to the first embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. However, in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the special figure 2 pending number is "4", while the probability of winning a small hit in the big hit determination related to the special figure 2 lottery is about "1/4" However, it is desirable that the denominator when the small winning probability is expressed as a fraction and the numerator is "1" is close to the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation number. This is because the boundary between whether or not the small win can be won in the entire remaining reservation can make the player excited while having expectations for the small win. In addition, as the range of approximation in this case, the part of the denominator is about twice or less than the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reserved, preferably 1/2 or more.

In addition, the number of round games related to the jackpot game and the set jackpot, the number of openings of the first big winning port 14 in each round game, and the opening time related to each opening, in other words, the number of prize balls to be acquired related to each jackpot game may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the ending time for the non-limiter jackpot game that constitutes the set jackpot is set to 0 seconds. , the ending time may be set to a time greater than 0 seconds. However, in this case, in order to handle a plurality of big winning games as one big winning game, it is desirable that the ending time related to the non-limiter big winning game is shorter than the ending time related to the limiter big winning game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the opening times related to the jackpot games constituting the set jackpot are all set to 10 seconds, but the opening times may be changed as appropriate. For example, there may be two or more types of opening times for the jackpot games that constitute the set jackpot. Specifically, in order to treat a plurality of jackpot games as one jackpot game, the opening time for the first jackpot game constituting the set jackpot is set to 10 seconds, and the opening time for the jackpot game other than the first jackpot game constituting the set jackpot is set to 10 seconds. The opening time relating to the big winning games other than the first one constituting the set big winning may be made shorter than the opening time relating to the first big winning game constituting the set big winning, such as setting the opening time to 2 seconds. Alternatively, moreover, in order to handle a plurality of jackpot games as one jackpot game, the opening time of the jackpot games other than the first that constitute the set jackpot is 0 seconds, in other words, the jackpots other than the first that constitute the set jackpot. The opening may not be performed in the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a plurality of jackpot games that are continuously and integrally executed are treated as one set jackpot, and the prize ball number effect is executed for the entire jackpot game of the plurality of times. Then, the multiple-time jackpot game targeted for the number-of-balls effect is not limited to the set jackpot, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, at the start of a certain jackpot game, if there is a "jackpot" as a look-ahead determination result in the special figure reserves that exist at that time, and it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed multiple times , You may make it perform prize ball number production|presentation about such a jackpot game of multiple times. Alternatively, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state as game states related to the jackpot winning probability, and the duration of the high probability state after the end of a certain jackpot game is high with respect to the jackpot winning probability "1/80". When the prescribed number of times is 10000 times or the like, when it is substantially likely that the player will win the next big win, the performance of the number of prize balls is executed for two big win games, the first big win game and the second big win game. You can do it.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls presentation is displayed in a fraction format with the number of prize balls to be won as the denominator and the number of prize balls already won as the numerator, but the display format is not limited to the first embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. can be Furthermore, the number-of-balls presentation may be displayed using a different type of image than numbers, such as a bar graph or a line graph. In addition, although the image display device 50 capable of displaying an image is used to execute the number-of-balls effect, the effect device for executing the number-of-balls effect is not limited to that of the first embodiment. It may be executed by other type of display device such as a display device. Furthermore, in the number-of-prize-balls presentation, the number of winning balls may not be displayed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the opening and closing mode of the second large winning opening 15 (operation mode of the second AT opening and closing member 15k) in the small winning game, and the opening and closing mode of the specific area 16 (operation mode of the distribution member 16k) It is not limited to one embodiment and may be changed as appropriate.

The opening/closing mode of the second big prize winning port 15 includes the number of times the second big prize winning port 15 is opened, the time required for each opening, the time required for closing after each opening, and the total opening time. For example, the opening of the second big winning opening 15 in the small hit opening negative period may be performed only once for the first time. Also, the opening of the second big winning opening 15 in the small winning opening active period may be 0.78 seconds in the first half and 0.78 seconds in the second half. In this case, the time required for closing between the opening in the first half and the opening in the latter half of the active small winning opening period is the opening time of the second big winning hole 15 per unit time related to the active small winning opening period. It may be set as appropriate within a range longer than the opening time of the second big prize opening 15 per unit time related to the negative period.

Furthermore, the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16 includes the number of times the specific area is opened, the time required for each opening, the time required for closing after each opening, and the total opening time. For example, in the small winning opening negative period, the specific area 16 is considered as the time from when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 15 to reaching the specific area 16 after the second large winning opening 15 is opened. It may be opened when the earliest possible time elapses. In addition, in the small winning open negative period, the specific area 16 is considered as the time from the game ball entering the second large winning opening 15 to reaching the specific area 16 after the second large winning opening 15 is closed. It may close after the latest available time.

Furthermore, the opening time and the ending time of the second big prize-winning hole 15 are not limited to those in the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. However, it is desirable that the opening time is at least longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the second big winning hole 15 after the small winning game is started. This is to prevent loss of the opportunity for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 15 . Further, in the first embodiment, the opening and closing mode of the second big winning opening 15 and the opening and closing mode of the specific area 16 in the small winning game when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal game state are the small winning patterns in the time saving state. is the same as the opening/closing mode of the second big winning hole 15 and the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16 in the small winning game when is stopped, but may be different. For example, in the small winning game related to the normal game state, like the small winning opening negative period of the small winning game related to the time saving state, and the small winning opening positive period, opening of the second big winning port 15 per unit time Instead of having a time-based period, the second big winning opening 15 may simply open once for 1.8 seconds.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game is executed by establishing the condition that the game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 passes through the specific area 16 in the small hit game. A jackpot game may be executed when a condition other than passing is satisfied. For example, the specific condition is that the number of game balls shot in the small winning game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 40 balls), or that the number of winning the second big winning opening 15 in the small winning game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 sphere) may be set.

Further, in the first embodiment, as the small winning medium specific effect executed in the small winning game, the first small winning medium specific effect to be executed in a small manner when it can be in a disadvantageous time saving state after that, and the advantageous time saving after that. There is a second small winning middle specific effect that is executed on a large scale when it can be in the state, and the small winning middle specific effect includes a right hitting promoting effect during a small winning, a V prize promoting effect, and a V winning notification effect. However, depending on the type of time-saving state that can occur after that, whether the production is executed in a small way or on a large scale is divided into the right-handed promotion production during the small win, the V winning promotion production, and the V It may be a part of the winning notification effect. In other words, what is executed on the reduced screen 50g when it is possible to be in an advantageous time saving state after that may be a part of the right hitting promotion effect during the small hit, the V winning promotion effect, and the V winning notification effect. Therefore, part of the first small hit middle right hitting promotion image G50, the V winning promotion image G53, and the V winning notification image G54 are reduced screens in the display unit 50a like the second small hitting middle right hitting promotion image G51. It may be executed in a portion other than 50g.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the second small winning middle specific effect, the second small winning middle right hitting promotion image G51 is executed in a portion other than the reduced screen 50g in the display unit 50a, but the first small winning It may be reduced and executed on the reduced screen 50g in the same manner as the middle right hitting promotion image G50.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first small hit middle specific effect is executed on the reduced screen 50g formed in a part of the display unit 50a, in other words, various images G50 related to the first small hit middle specific effect, By displaying G53 and G54 smaller than various images G50, G53, and G54 relating to the second small hit medium specific effect, the first small hit medium specific effect is relatively small, that is, the second small hit medium specific effect. It is executed in a manner that is inconspicuous compared to the However, as a mode in which the first small winning middle specific effect is executed in a less conspicuous manner than the second small winning middle specific effect, it may be executed by a method other than reducing the size. For example, the first small hit middle specific effect is also executed on the entire screen of the display unit 50a in the same manner as the second small hit middle specific effect, but the first small hit middle specific effect is executed with a transparency of 50%, and the second small win middle specific effect is executed. The transparency related to the first small winning medium specific effect may be higher than the transparency related to the second small winning medium specific production so that the small winning medium specific production is executed with a transparency of 0%.

Also, in the first embodiment, the second special effect can be executed only when the number of special figures 2 pending is 4 of the upper limit when the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining pending is started, For example, 3 or more, in other words, when there is a predetermined number or more than the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation number, it may be possible to execute. For example, when the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 pending is 8, and the number of special figures 2 pending is 5 or more, which is 3 less than the upper limit when the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining hold is started The second special effect may be executable.

Furthermore, the second special effect is executed when the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of the reservation order 4 related to the upper limit value of the number of special figure 2 reservations is executed, but the execution time is this , and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the special mode, it is possible to display the pending icon or the icon in the basic embodiment, and using the pending icon or the icon, when the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining hold is started Special figure 2 hold An effect that can be executed only when the number is the upper limit of four may be executed.

In addition, the out count related to the first first special effect in the special mode differs depending on the number of special figures 2 pending when the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining hold is started, and then the special figure 2 related to the loss Each time the variable display ends, the out count is incremented by one. For example, regardless of the special figure 2 reservation number when the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining reservation is started, even if the number of special figure 2 reservations is 2 or less, the first second in the special mode 1 special effect is started with an out count of "1", and after that, the out count may increase by 2 with one special figure 2 variable display (first special effect). On the contrary, even if it is a special figure 2 variable display (first special effect) related to losing, the out count may not increase.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the time saving state ends by executing the special figure 2 variable display of the number of time saving specified times in the time saving state, the special figure confirmation time related to the last special figure 2 variable display is other However, in this case, for example, it may be set to a longer time than the sum of the normal pattern fluctuation time in the time saving state and the time required for the auxiliary game, such as 10 seconds. This is to avoid contradiction in the special mode performance by winning the second starting port 12 after entering the special mode.

Also, the content of the effect relating to the first special effect is not limited to that of the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the final total of the ball count and the strike count in one first special effect, in other words, the total of the intermediate results to be derived may be one or two. Further, although the intermediate result "foul" is derived only after the reach is established, it may be derived before the reach is established. Alternatively, an intermediate result of "ball" or "missing" may be derived after a reach is established. In this case, even after the ready-to-win state is established, when the intermediate result "ball" or "miss" is derived, the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be performed, or the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be displayed. The specific display of EZ3 may be prevented.

Furthermore, in the first special effect, when the enemy character, the batter, hits a home run, a small hit or a big win occurs. When the batter strikes out (when the batter strikes out or flies left), a small hit or a big win occurs, and as the number of strikes favorable to the pitcher increases, the degree of expectation for a small win or big win may increase.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when a "strikeout" is derived, it always results in a loss. can be

In addition, although the theme of the first special effect is a one-at-bat confrontation in baseball, the theme of the first special effect may be changed as appropriate. For example, a baseball tournament is played throughout a plurality of first special effects, the final result of each first special effect is the victory or defeat of the game, and the intermediate results are the points scored and the points conceded. You can do so. That is, the scales for final results and intermediate results may be changed. Alternatively, the theme of the first special presentation may be changed to a game other than baseball.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, there are three types of special figure 2 variation patterns related to the first special effect associated with each jackpot determination result, but two types or less or four types or more may be used. Also, the type of the special figure 2 variation pattern may be different between the jackpot determination results. Further, in the first embodiment, the reach is always established in the first special effect, but the reach may not be established in some cases.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the intermediate result "foul" is derived, the specific display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is not performed, but the specific display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Also good. In this case, the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 having the same combination as the intermediate result "missing" may be executed. Alternatively, the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are different in order from the intermediate result "missing", may be executed. In addition, it may be possible to execute a temporary stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are different from the sequence or the loose stitches, such as descending order. Alternatively, the specific display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may not be executed when the intermediate results are derived.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the first special effect, after the "ball" and "whiff" are derived as the animation related to the background image, the specific display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed. While the EZ3 is in the temporary stop display, the interim result corresponding image G62 relating to "ball" and "missing" is displayed, but the execution order of these is not limited to this and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 corresponding to the “ball” and “whiff” are temporarily stopped and displayed, the animation related to the background image is “ball” and It is also possible to derive the "missing" and then display the interim result corresponding image G62 related to "ball" and "missing". Alternatively, "ball" and "whiff" are derived as animations related to the background image, and after the interim result corresponding image G62 related to "ball" and "whiff" is displayed, "ball" and "whiff" are handled. Specific display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be executed. Further, as a game process component, the image G62 corresponding to the intermediate result may not be displayed. Alternatively, the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be prevented from being executed as a winning process component.

In addition, in the first special effect, a chance-up effect may be made executable which suggests that the possibility of a big win or a small win is increased by being executed. A specific example of the chance-up production will be described. For example, when the first special effect is being executed, the display unit 50a can display various special abilities related to the batter, which is the enemy character, and various types of special abilities related to the pitcher, which is the main character. do.

The display mode of the special ability is not particularly limited, and the special ability may be displayed with an icon representing the special ability, or may be displayed with characters representing the special ability. Also, the number of special abilities displayed can be set as appropriate. For example, as the number of displayed special abilities increases, the possibility of a big win or a small win may increase. Furthermore, a plurality of timings at which the special ability is displayed on the display section 50a may be set. Also, when a plurality of special abilities are displayed on the display unit 50a, they may be displayed one by one as appropriate, or all or part of them may be displayed as appropriate. Then, the special abilities displayed on the display section 50a are stocked.

The special ability is the ability of the character that can be used for batting or pitching. When the scene represented by the special ability is displayed while the special ability disappears (activates), the possibility of a big win or a small win increases. For example, batter-related special abilities include ball selection and stickiness, and pitcher-related special abilities include control and breaking balls. For example, when the special ability "eyeball selection" is stocked in the display section 50a, the special ability is activated, the batter passes the ball, and the interim result "ball" is derived. Also, when the special ability "breaking ball" is stocked in the display section 50a, the special ability is activated, the pitcher throws the breaking ball, and the intermediate result "miss" is derived. In these cases, the special ability is stocked (displayed), and then the special ability is activated, and the scene corresponding to the special ability is displayed in the animation, so the possibility of a big or small win increases. rice field. That is, the chance-up effect is executed.

As the timing for activating the stocked (displayed) special ability, a plurality of timings such as before the reach is established and after the reach is established may be set. Furthermore, a plurality of stocked (displayed) special abilities may be activated at the same time. In addition, it may be so arranged that the stocked (displayed) special ability may not be activated. In this case, the special ability displayed on the display section 50a may disappear at a specific timing such as a win-lose junction.

7. Inventions Disclosed in the Aforedescribed Embodiments The following inventions A to F are disclosed by the preceding paragraph in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]. In the descriptions of inventions A to F, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiments of the invention described above and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A3, Invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B3, Invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C5, and Invention D is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C5. , Invention E is a generic term for inventions E1 to E4 below, and Invention F is a generic term for inventions F1 to F4 below.

According to the invention A, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172741 has an effect of improving amusement in a game with respect to the problem 1 described below. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172741, among various specifications for gaming machines, one gaming machine has a specification called “first type (so-called “digipachi type”)”. , specifications called “second type (so-called “wing mono type”)”) are mixed (so-called “one type and two types mixing machine”). For the part of the specification called the 1st type, a special 1 lottery is held when the game ball wins the 1st start opening, and if you win a jackpot in the special 1 lottery, the 1st big winning opening A jackpot game opened by is executed. On the other hand, for the part of the specification called the second type, a special figure 2 lottery is held with the winning of the second start opening, and when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, first a specific area inside (so-called "V zone") operates for a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and a small winning game is executed in which the second large winning opening is opened. When the game ball enters this specific area, a big winning game is executed in which the second big winning opening is opened. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the amusement of games in gaming machines in which specifications called the first type and specifications called the second type are mixed. Therefore, the first task is to provide a new gaming machine that enhances amusement in games.

In addition, according to the invention B, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181254 has the effect of improving amusement in the game with respect to the problem 2 described below. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-181254, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot is achieved. A game is executed. Then, when the jackpot game is being executed, the number of game media obtainable in the jackpot game may be displayed. However, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the enjoyment of games in gaming machines that display the number of game media that can be obtained. Therefore, the second task is to provide a novel gaming machine that enhances amusement in games.

In addition, according to the invention C, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-181254 has the effect of reducing the disadvantage to the player against the problem 3 described below. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181254, a game is played by shooting game balls toward a game area. The game area is provided with an openable and closable variable starting opening, an openable and closable big winning opening, and the like. In addition, there may be a specific area provided in the game area that is controlled so that a game ball that has entered the big winning opening when the big winning opening is open can or cannot pass through. By the way, pachinko gaming machines have various game characteristics, among them, in the gaming machine described in JP 2019-181254 A, the big winning opening is opened in a specific game, and the big winning opening is opened during the opening. By passing the game ball that has entered the specific area, it may become a game state advantageous to the player. However, there are various arrangements of the variable starting opening and the big winning opening, and various opening modes of the variable starting opening and the big winning opening. By doing so, it is possible that entry of the game ball into the big winning opening may be blocked. In this case, although the player was able to execute the specific game, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, the third task is to provide a new gaming machine that reduces the disadvantages of the player.

In addition, according to the invention D, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172741 has an effect of improving amusement in a game with respect to the problem 4 described below. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172741, when a small prize is won in a special drawing lottery, a large winning opening having a specific area (so-called "V zone") inside is opened for a short time (for example, 1.5 second) is activated, and a small winning game in which the big winning opening is opened is executed. Then, when the game ball passes through this specific area, the game state becomes advantageous to the player. In addition, when the small winning game is being executed, a message is displayed to change the left-handed game that has been performed so far to the right-handed game. The display of this message functions as an effect relating to establishment of a specific condition for making the game state advantageous to the player. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the enjoyment of games in gaming machines that may execute an effect related to the establishment of a specific condition for achieving a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the fourth task is to provide a novel gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the invention E, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181254 has an effect of improving amusement in the game with respect to the problem 5 described below. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181254, it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols, and when the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display of special symbols, the game state becomes advantageous to the player. Then, when the right to execute the variable display of the special symbols is acquired in a situation where the variable display of the special symbols cannot be started, the right is reserved, and the variable display of the special symbols related to the reserved right is started. is established, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. By the way, at the end of a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state, the right to execute variable display of special symbols may be reserved. may be executed. However, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the interest in games with respect to gaming machines that may execute special effects using the reserved right to execute variable display of special symbols. Therefore, the fifth task is to provide a novel gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the invention F, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181254 has an effect of improving amusement in the game with respect to the problem 6 described below. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181254, the variable display of special symbols can be executed, and when the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbols, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. be. Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed or when the jackpot game is executed, various effects are executed. For example, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed, an effect (ready-to-win effect) in which predetermined characters confront each other is executed, and when the first result (defeat) is derived in the confrontation, the jackpot game is not executed. , a jackpot game is executed when a second result (win) is derived, which suggests that the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is higher than that of the first result. However, for a gaming machine that may execute an effect that derives the first result or a second result that suggests that the possibility of becoming a more advantageous gaming state than the first result is high, in order to improve the amusement of the game. there is still room for improvement. Therefore, the sixth task is to provide a new gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The game machine according to invention A1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
A variable winning area (second big winning opening 15) that can be opened and closed and into which game balls can enter when opened;
A specific area (specific area 16) that is controlled to a specific state through which a game ball that has entered the variable winning area can pass and a non-specific state that cannot be passed through,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute variable display of the first identification information (special figure 1), and when the first identification result (stop display of the jackpot symbol) is derived by the variable display of the first identification information, the second advantageous to the player 1 Execute an advantageous game (jackpot game),
It is possible to perform variable display of the second identification information (special figure 2), and when the second specific result (stop display of the small winning pattern) is derived by the variable display of the second identification information, the specific area is the In a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific state and executes a second advantageous game (small winning game) that is advantageous to a player when a game ball passes through the specific area,
The game control means is
According to the end of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which the variable display of the second identification information is easier to execute than in the normal state,
A predetermined number of times (two times) with the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game intervening, and the second specified result is derived in the time saving state when the time saving state occurs continuously, and the second advantageous game The gaming machine is characterized in that when the game is executed, the normal state is set in response to the end of the second advantageous game.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to Invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A1,
The game control means, when the second specified result is derived in the normal state and the second advantageous game is executed, the time saving state that can be continued for the first period in response to the end of the second advantageous game A game machine characterized in that there is a time to make it a (disadvantageous time-saving state) and a time to make the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that can be continued for a second period longer than the first period.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A1 or Invention A2,
The game control means is
variable display of the second identification information can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
If the predetermined condition is satisfied but the variable display of the second identification information cannot be started, the right to execute the variable display of the second identification information can be reserved up to a predetermined number (four). A gaming machine characterized by being able to

8-2-1. Invention B1
The game machine according to invention B1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing a specific game (jackpot game) capable of acquiring a game medium (game ball) when a specific result (jackpot, small win) is obtained in a predetermined determination (jackpot determination);
A gaming machine comprising a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of displaying predetermined information on a display unit (display unit 50a),
The game control means, in accordance with the end of the specific game, may be in an advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The effect control means executes, on the display unit, a specific display (a prize ball number effect) indicating the number of game media obtainable in a plurality of specific games including the one specific game in one specific game. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means may execute the specific display on the display section in each of the plurality of specific games.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
The game control means, in response to the end of a predetermined specific game, after entering the advantageous game state (time saving state), without executing the predetermined determination in the normal game state, continuously a predetermined number of times When the specific game is executed as the specific result in the last advantageous game state when the advantageous game state is reached, the normal game state is set in response to the end of the specific game, and the predetermined A gaming machine characterized in that, in a specific game, the display section may execute the specific display indicating the number of game media obtainable in the specific game that can be executed until the normal game state is reached.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In the game area, between a variable means (electric chew opening/closing member 12k) capable of switching operation between the first mode and the second mode, and a normal mode and a specific mode in which game balls enter more easily than the normal mode A changeable variable winning area (second big winning opening 15) and a specific area (specific area 16) through which a game ball entering the variable winning area can pass are provided,
The game control means executes a specific game (small winning game) in which the variable winning area becomes the specific mode, and when the game ball passes through the specific area in the specific game, an advantageous game state ( In a game machine that may be in a jackpot game state, a time saving state),
A game ball that has passed through a predetermined position in the game area (the position where the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is installed) can enter the variable winning area,
The variable means may prevent the game ball from passing through the predetermined position when held in the second mode,
When the game ball passes through the specific area in a predetermined game state (time-saving state), the variable means becomes a specific game state (normal game state) in which the second mode is less likely than the predetermined game state,
The specific game has a first period (small hit open negative period) and a second period (small hit open positive period) after the first period, and in the first period and the second period The variable winning area is in the specific mode at least once, and the time during which the variable winning area is in the specific mode during the second period is longer than the time during which the variable winning area is in the specific mode during the first period. A game machine characterized by having a longer side.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The game machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
In the first period, when the variable winning area first changes to the specific mode and then to the normal mode, the normal mode lasts longer than the time (0.12 seconds) of the first specific mode (2. 5 seconds).

8-3-3. Invention C3
The game machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention C2,
In the first period, the variable winning area becomes the specific mode at least twice, and both the time (0.12 seconds) of the first specific mode and the second specific mode, The time (2.5 seconds) of the normal mode after the first specific mode and the time (1.5 seconds) of the normal mode after the second specific mode are longer. game machine.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The game machine according to invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to the invention C3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the time of the normal mode after the first specific mode is longer than the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to invention C4,
In the second period, the unit action in which the variable winning area in the normal mode changes to the specific mode and returns to the normal mode is executed a plurality of times (13 times), and the specific mode time (0 The time (0.6 seconds) of the normal mode related to the unit action is longer than 0.12 seconds),
The time of the normal mode after the first specific mode in the first period and the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode in the first period are greater than the time of the normal mode related to the unit motion. is long.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
When a specific condition (passage of a game ball through a specific area 16) is established during execution of a specific game (small win game), an advantageous game state (time saving state) more advantageous to the player than a normal game state may be set. game execution means (game control microcomputer 101);
A game machine comprising a production execution means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (small hit medium specific effect) related to establishment of the specific condition,
When the specific condition is satisfied while the specific game is being executed, the predetermined effect is performed in the first mode (the entire screen of the display unit 50a) when the advantageous game state (disadvantageous time saving state) that can be continued for the first period is established. , and when the specific condition is established when the specific game is being executed, the second period longer than the first period) If the advantageous game state (advantageous time saving state) can be continued, the first A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed in a second mode (reduced screen 50g) that is harder to recognize than the mode.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
When a specific condition (passage of a game ball through a specific area 16) is established during the execution of a specific game (small winning game), when making a normal game state, and an advantageous game more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that has a time to make a state (time saving state);
A game machine comprising a production execution means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (small hit medium specific effect) related to establishment of the specific condition,
When the normal game state is established when the specific condition is satisfied while the specific game is being executed, the predetermined effect is executed in the first mode (the entire screen of the display unit 50a), and the specific game is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the advantageous game state is entered when the specific condition is satisfied when the player is in the game machine, the predetermined effect is executed in a second mode (reduced screen 50g) that is harder to recognize than the first mode.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1 or invention D2,
Further provided with an operation means (handle 72k) capable of operating to shoot the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition can be established by a game ball that has been shot, and will not be established if the game ball is not shot in the specific game.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
An advantageous game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is made based on the derivation of the specific result (stop display of the jackpot pattern, stop display of the small hit pattern) by the variable display of the identification information (special figure 2). A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of
Equipped with a production execution means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing production,
The game executing means establishes the second condition (the end of the special figure 2 variable display related to the loss) after the first condition (the special figure 2 reservation number is less than 4 and the second start port 12 is won) is established. A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the identification information by
The game executing means can reserve the right to execute the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the first condition when the first condition is established but the second condition is not established. can be,
The effect executing means provides a predetermined effect (second special effect) when the right is reserved for a predetermined number (four) or more at a predetermined reference time (at the start of the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining reservation) and the predetermined effect is not executed when the right is not reserved for the predetermined number or more.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The game machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
The gaming machine, wherein the game executing means can reserve the rights up to the predetermined number.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E2,
When the predetermined number of the rights are reserved at the predetermined reference time, the effect execution means performs the last variable display of the identification information among the variable displays of the identification information based on the rights. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the predetermined effect at the same time.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The game machine according to invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to invention E3,
When the predetermined number of the rights are reserved at the predetermined reference time, the effect execution means performs variable display of the identification information other than the last among the variable displays of the identification information based on the rights. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific effect (first special effect) different from the predetermined effect at times.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is
A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that can make an advantageous game state (jackpot game state, time saving state) advantageous to the player;
Equipped with a production execution means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
A predetermined effect (first special effect) can be executed,
In the predetermined effect, a plurality of unit effects (game process components) are repeatedly executed, and finally, as a final result, the first result (strikeout / loss), or the advantageous game rather than the first result A second result (home run / jackpot / small win) is derived that suggests that the state is likely to occur,
A gaming machine characterized in that in each of the unit performances, a third result (strikeout) or a fourth result (ball) different from the first result and the second result is finally derived.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The game machine according to invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
The game executing means is capable of executing variable display of the identification information, and in the variable display of the identification information, a specified result (stop display of the jackpot pattern, stop display of the small win pattern) or a non-specified result (stop of the losing pattern) display) and deriving the specified result may cause the advantageous gaming state,
The game machine, wherein the effect execution means may execute the predetermined effect when the variable display of the identification information is being executed.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
The effect executing means may execute variable display of the effect symbols (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3) according to the variable display of the identification information, and in the variable display of the effect symbols, a specific mode according to the specified result. There are times when the performance pattern is stopped and displayed in (double eyes) and when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a non-specific mode (disconnected eyes, reach-missing eyes) according to the non-specific result,
In the unit effect, the effect pattern is stop-displayed in a first predetermined mode (separate eyes) in response to deriving the third result, and the effect symbol is displayed in a second state in response to deriving the fourth result. A gaming machine characterized in that it may stop and display in a predetermined manner (in order).

PY, PY1 Pachinko machine 1 Game board 6 Game area 6A Left game area 6B Right game area 11 First start port 11a First start port sensor 12 Second start port 12a Second start port Sensor 12k Electric chew opening/closing member 13 Gate 14 First big prize opening 14a First big prize opening sensor 14k First AT opening/closing member 15 Second big prize opening 15a Second big prize opening sensor 15k Second AT Opening/closing member 16 Specific area 16a Specific area sensor 16k Distribution member 50 Image display device 50a Display unit 52 Speaker 53 Frame lamp 100 Game control board 101 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control board 121 Production control microcomputer 140: Image control board

Claims (3)

game control means capable of executing a specific game capable of acquiring game media when a predetermined determination results in a specific result;
A game machine comprising an effect control means capable of displaying predetermined information on a display unit,
According to the end of the specific game, the game control means may set an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The effect control means may execute, in one specific game, a specific display indicating the number of game media obtainable in a plurality of specific games including the one specific game, on the display unit. Characteristic game machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means may execute the specific display on the display section in each of the plurality of specific games. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
After entering the advantageous game state in response to the end of a predetermined specific game, the game control means continues the advantageous game state for a predetermined number of times without executing the predetermined determination in the normal game state. When the specific game is executed with the specific result in the last advantageous game state when , the normal game state is set in response to the end of the specific game, and in the predetermined specific game, The gaming machine is characterized in that the display unit may execute the specific display indicating the number of game media obtainable in a specific game that can be executed until the normal game state is reached.

Images